Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look at All You Can Do with the RM-700!
Full-fledged Piano Performance
Piano Sounds with Rich Resonance and Wide-Ranging Expressiveness
The stereo multi-sampled piano sound generator vividly reproduces even the sound of the
hammer striking the strings and the subtle sound of a key being released, faithfully delivering
the sound of a high-quality concert grand piano.
“Ivory Feel” Keyboard Provides Grand Piano Touch and Feel
The “Ivory Feel Keyboard” uses cutting-edge technology to reproduce the tactile sensation of
ivory and ebony, considered to be the ultimate materials for a piano keyboard. Together with
the “Progressive Hammer Action II (PHA II)” mechanism, which simulates the distinctive touch
of a piano action, you can enjoy the playing feel and response that top-level performers expect
from a grand piano.
Use “Piano Designer” to Customize Your Piano Sound
p. 29
This feature simulates the sound and expressive power of the grand piano, including aspects
such as the sympathetic resonance of the piano strings, the way in which the sound is affected
by the opened or closed position of the piano lid, and the subtle sounds that occur when the
damper pedal is pressed to release the strings. You can create your own personalized piano
sound by adjusting these factors to your taste.
Enjoy Performing
Enjoy Performing with Automatic Accompaniment
p. 52
Built into the RM-700 are a broad range of Music Styles (rhythm and automatic
accompaniment patterns) that cover favorite musical genres from around the world.
The “One Touch Song” function makes it easy to add the ideal accompaniment or sound to the
songs you want to play.
Use “Slide Show” and “Anime” to Visually Enhance Your Performance
p. 90, p. 94
“Slide Show” automatically switches between images at the specified timing. By using this in
conjunction with the “Anime” function, which displays graphics or text in time with your
keyboard performance or the song playback, you can enjoy a variety of images that change
along with the performance.
Enjoy the Music Visually With the Piano Roll Screen
p. 96
The on-screen keyboard can automatically move according to the notes while a song plays, or
you can watch a visual representation of the pitch and duration of the notes. This means that
you can enjoy music not just with your ears, but also with your eyes.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look at All You Can Do with the RM-700!
Take Advantage of a Wide Range of Music File
p. 75
The RM-700 supports the GM2 specification—the universal standard for SMF music file. You
can connect separately available USB memory or a CD drive (or floppy disk drive) and take
advantage of a rich variety of SMF music file.
You can also play back music CD or audio/MP3 format songs, or use VIMA TUNES (CD-ROMs
produced for VIMA) to enjoy music and slide shows.
Learn and Practice Enjoyably
DigiScore
p. 106
The “DigiScore” function can display notation in the display not only for the internal songs but
also for SMF format songs or performances you’ve recorded on the RM-700.
This convenient function lets you perform while viewing the notation, or check a performance
that you’ve recorded.
Visual Lesson
p. 99
As you play along with the accompaniment, this function evaluates and grades your playing.
You can view the results as musical notation to see how it differs from the model. You can also
print your performance results as notation.
Wonderland
p. 98
This lets you have fun listening to the sound of various instruments and playing musical
games. It's an enjoyable way to discover new enjoyment of sound and musical instruments.
Playing Hint
p. 78
Some of the internal songs let you take advantage of “Playing Hints,” which provide
suggestions for your performance as the song progresses.
You can also view information about the song or a profile of the composer.
Twin Piano
p. 104
This function lets you split the keyboard into left and right regions so that two people can
perform in the same register.
When one person is mirroring the other’s playing, this is an easy way to check whether the two
are playing the identical notes.
You can also have fun with “Twin Piano Games” for enjoyably practicing music in a game-like
fashion.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
The symbol alerts the user to important instructions or
warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the triangle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general
cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert the
user to the risk of death or severe injury
should the unit be used improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert the
user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be
carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that must
not be done is indicated by the design contained within
the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that
the unit must never be disassembled.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic animals
or pets.
The symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the
case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-cord
plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
Do not disassemble or modify
Connect the power cord to an outlet of the correct
002a
voltage
•
Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the
unit.
008a
•
The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the
type described in the operating instructions, or as marked
on the rear side of unit.
................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................
Do not repair or replace parts
003
Use only the included power cord
•
Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts within it
(except when this manual provides specific instructions
directing you to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer,
the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
008e
•
Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also, the supplied
power cord must not be used with any other device.
................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................
Do not bend the power cord or place heavy objects on
it
Never install the unit in any of the following locations
009
004
•
Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor place
heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the cord,
producing severed elements and short circuits. Damaged
cords are fire and shock hazards!
•
Never install the unit in any of the following locations.
•
Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight in
an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of heat-
generating equipment); or are
................................................................................................................................................
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are
Exposed to steam or smoke; or are
Subject to salt exposure; or are
Humid; or are
Avoid extended use at high volume
010
•
This unit, either alone or in combination with an amplifier
and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do
not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level,
or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any
hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should immediately
stop using the unit, and consult an audiologist.
Exposed to rain; or are
Dusty or sandy; or are
Subject to high levels of vibration and shakiness.
................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................
Do not place in an unstable location
007
Do not insert foreign objects
•
Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is level and
sure to remain stable. Never place it on stands that could
wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
011
•
Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material, coins,
pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft drinks, etc.) to
penetrate the unit.
................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn off the power if an abnormality or malfunction
Do not place containers of water on the device
026
occurs
•
Do not put anything that contains water (e.g., flower vases)
on this unit. Also, avoid the use of insecticides, perfumes,
alcohol, nail polish, spray cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly
wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft
cloth.
012a
•
Immediately turn the power off, remove the power cord
from the outlet, and request servicing by your retailer, the
nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page when:
................................................................................................................................................
•
The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged;
or
Never expose battery to excessive heat
027
•
•
If smoke or unusual odor occurs
•
Never expose Battery to excessive heat such as sunshine,
fire or the like.
Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been spilled onto
the unit; or
................................................................................................................................................
•
•
The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise has
become wet); or
The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits
a marked change in performance.
................................................................................................................................................
Place in a well ventilated location
Do not allow children to use without supervision
101a
013
•
The unit should be located so that its location or position
does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
•
In households with small children, an adult should provide
supervision until the child is capable of following all the
rules essential for the safe operation of the unit.
................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................
Grasp the plug when connecting or disconnecting the
Do not drop or subject to strong impact
power cord
014
102b
•
Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
•
Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply cord when
plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.
................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................
Do not share an outlet with an unreasonable number
Periodically wipe the dust off the power cord plug
103a
of other devices
015
•
At regular intervals, you should unplug the power plug and
clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other
accumulations away from its prongs. Also, disconnect the
power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to
remain unused for an extended period of time. Any
accumulation of dust between the power plug and the
power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire.
•
Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share an outlet
with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be
especially careful when using extension cords—the total
power used by all devices you have connected to the
extension cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive loads can
cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually
melt through.
................................................................................................................................................
Manage cables for safety
................................................................................................................................................
104
•
Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled.
Also, all cords and cables should be placed so they are out
of the reach of children.
Do not use overseas
016
•
Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with your
retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized
Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
................................................................................................................................................
Do not stand or place heavy objects on this device
................................................................................................................................................
106
•
Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the unit.
Do not recharge, heat, or disassemble the batteries
Do not incinerate or submerge in water
019
•
................................................................................................................................................
Batteries must never be recharged, heated, taken apart, or
thrown into fire or water.
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet
hands
107b
•
Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands
when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this
unit.
................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................
Do not use a CD-ROM in an audio CD player or DVD
player
023
•
DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional audio CD
player or DVD player. The resulting sound may be of a level
that could cause permanent hearing loss. Damage to
speakers or other system components may result.
................................................................................................................................................
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cautions when moving this unit
Cautions when dispose batteries
112
108d: Selection
•
If you need to move the instrument, take note of the
precautions listed below. At least two persons are required
to safely lift and move the unit. It should be handled
firm grip, to protect yourself from injury and the instrument
from damage.
•
Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with
whatever regulations for their safe disposal that may be
observed in the region in which you live.
................................................................................................................................................
Caution when opening/closing the lid
116
•
Be careful when opening/closing the lid so you do not get
your fingers pinched (p. 20). Adult supervision is recom-
mended whenever small children use the unit.
1
•
Check to make sure the knob bolts securing the unit to
the stand have not become loose. Fasten them again
securely whenever you notice any loosening.
................................................................................................................................................
2
3
4
5
7
Cautions when using the bench
•
•
•
•
•
Disconnect the power cord.
117
•
When using the bench, please observe the following points:
1
Disconnect all cords coming from external devices.
Raise the adjusters on the stand (p. 22).
Close the lid.
•
•
•
Do not use the bench as a toy, or as a stepping stool.
Do not allow two or more persons to sit on the bench.
2
4
Do not sit on the bench if the bolts holding the bench
legs are loose. (If the bolts are loose, immediately re-
tighten them using the supplied tool.)
Fold down the music stand.
................................................................................................................................................
5
Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before
•
When opening or closing the seat lid, be careful not to
pinch your fingers. In particular, be careful not to pinch
your fingers in the folding metal supports.
cleaning
109a
•
Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug the
power cord from the outlet (p. 19).
................................................................................................................................................
Keep small items out of the reach of children
................................................................................................................................................
118c
•
Always keep the following parts including with the RM-700
and small components that may be removed out of the
reach of small children to avoid accidental ingestion of
these parts.
If there is a possibility of lightning strike, disconnect
the power cord from the AC outlet
110a
•
Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your
area, pull the plug on the power cord out of the outlet.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Included Parts
................................................................................................................................................
External memory anti-theft lock securing screw
Removable parts
Cautions when using batteries
111: Selection
•
If used improperly, batteries may explode or leak and cause
damage or injury. In the interest of safety, please read and
observe the following precautions (p. 20).
Screws fastening the stand
Screws fastening music rest
the thumbscrew fastening the headphone hook
1
2
3
5
................................................................................................................................................
•
•
•
•
Carefully follow the installation instructions for batteries,
and make sure you observe the correct polarity.
Avoid using new batteries together with used ones. In
addition, avoid mixing different types of batteries.
Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to remain
unused for an extended period of time.
If a battery has leaked, use a soft piece of cloth or paper
towel to wipe all remnants of the discharge from the
battery compartment. Then install new batteries. To
avoid inflammation of the skin, make sure that none of
the battery discharge gets onto your hands or skin.
Exercise the utmost caution so that none of the
discharge gets near your eyes. Immediately rinse the
affected area with running water if any of the discharge
has entered the eyes.
6
•
Never keep batteries together with metallic objects such
as ballpoint pens, necklaces, hairpins, etc.
................................................................................................................................................
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Notes
358
•
Power Supply
Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard. This can be
the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce sound.
301
•
Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used by
an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter (such as a
refrigerator, washing machine, microwave oven, or air conditioner), or
that contains a motor. Depending on the way in which the electrical
appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit to
malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not practical to use a
separate electrical outlet, connect a power supply noise filter
between this unit and the electrical outlet.
359
•
Do not paste stickers, decals, or the like to this instrument. Peeling
such matter off the instrument may damage the exterior finish.
Maintenance
401b
•
To clean the unit, use a dry, soft cloth; or one that is slightly
dampened. Try to wipe the entire surface using an equal amount of
strength, moving the cloth along with the grain of the wood. Rubbing
too hard in the same area can damage the finish.
304b
•
To prevent malfunction, switch off the piano’s power before you
install or replace the batteries in the included remote control unit.
306b
402
•
•
Batteries are supplied with the Remote Control. The life of these
Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to avoid
the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.
batteries may be limited, however, since their primary purpose was to
enable testing.
307
•
Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to all
units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to speakers
or other devices.
Repairs and Data
452
•
308
•
Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s memory may be
lost when the unit is sent for repairs. Important data should always be
backed up on an external memory, or written down on paper (when
possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data.
However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related to memory
itself is out of order), we regret that it may not be possible to restore
the data, and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of
data.
Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER switch
is switched off, this does not mean that the unit has been completely
disconnected from the source of power. If you need to turn off the
power completely, first turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the
power cord from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into
which you choose to connect the power cord’s plug should be one
that is within easy reach and readily accessible.
Placement
Additional Precautions
351
551
•
Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment containing
large power transformers) may induce hum. To alleviate the problem,
change the orientation of this unit; or move it farther away from the
source of interference.
•
Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost
as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the unit. To
protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data, we
recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important
data you have stored in the unit’s memory on an external memory.
352a
•
This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do not
552
•
use this device in the vicinity of such receivers.
352b
Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of data
that was stored in the unit’s memory or on an external memory once
it has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning
such loss of data.
•
Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such as
cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise could
occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing. Should
you experience such problems, you should relocate such wireless
devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch them
off.
553
•
Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s buttons,
sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and connectors.
Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
354b
554
•
•
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices that
Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise subject it
to temperature extremes. Also, do not allow lighting devices that
normally are used while their light source is very close to the unit
(such as a piano light), or powerful spotlights to shine upon the same
area of the unit for extended periods of time. Excessive heat can
deform or discolor the unit.
556
•
When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector
itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing shorts,
or damage to the cable’s internal elements.
557
•
A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal
operation.
355b
558a
•
•
When moved from one location to another where the temperature
To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s volume at
and/or humidity is very different, water droplets (condensation) may
form inside the unit. Damage or malfunction may result if you
attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore, before using the
unit, you must allow it to stand for several hours, until the conden-
sation has completely evaporated.
reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you do not
need to be concerned about those around you (especially when it is
late at night).
559b
•
When you need to transport the unit, pack it in shock-absorbent
material. Transporting the unit without doing so can cause it to
become scratched or damaged, and could lead to malfunction.
356
•
Do not allow rubber, vinyl, or similar materials to remain on the unit
for long periods of time. Such objects can discolor or otherwise
harmfully affect the finish.
560
•
Do not apply undue force to the music stand while it is in use.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Notes
561
•
USB Memory Handling
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5/7; sold separately). By
connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing malfunction
and/or damage to the unit.
704
•
When connecting USB memory, firmly insert it all the way in.
705
•
562
•
Do not touch the pins of the USB memory connector, or allow them to
become dirty.
Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables that
incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use of such
cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low, or impossible to
hear. For information on cable specifications, contact the manufac-
turer of the cable.
708
•
USB memory is made using high-precision electronic components, so
please observe the following points when handling it.
•
To prevent damage from static electrical charges, discharge any
static electricity that might be present in your body before
handling USB memory.
565
•
Before opening or closing the keyboard lid, always make sure that no
pets or other small animals are located on top of the instrument (in
particular, they should be kept away from the keyboard and its lid).
Otherwise, due to the structural design of this instrument, small pets
or other animals could end up getting trapped inside it. If such a
situation is encountered, you must immediately switch off the power
and disconnect the power cord from the outlet. You should then
consult with the retailer from whom the instrument was purchased, or
contact the nearest Roland Service Center.
•
•
•
Do not touch the terminals with your fingers or any metal object.
Do not bend or drop USB memory, or subject it to strong impact.
Do not leave USB memory in direct sunlight or in locations such as
a closed-up automobile. (Storage temperature: 0–50 degrees C).
•
•
Do not allow USB memory to become wet.
Do not disassemble or modify USB memory.
Add
•
When connecting USB memory, position it horizontally with the
external memory connector and insert it without using excessive
force. The external memory connector may be damaged if you use
excessive force when inserting USB memory.
Floppy Disk Handling
(Using Optional Floppy Disk Drive)
651
Add
•
Do not insert anything other than USB memory (e.g., wire, coins, other
types of device) into the external memory connector. Doing so will
damage the external memory connector.
•
Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of magnetic
storage medium. Microscopic precision is required to enable storage
of large amounts of data on such a small surface area. To preserve
their integrity, please observe the following when handling floppy
disks:
Add
•
Add
Do not apply excessive force to the connected USB memory.
•
•
•
Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.
Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas.
•
If you will not be using USB memory for an extended period of time,
close the USB memory cover.
Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recommended temperature
range: 10 to 50˚C (50 to 122˚F).
•
Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields, such as
those generated by loudspeakers.
652
•
Floppy disks have a “write protect” tab which can protect the disk
from accidental erasure. It is recommended that the tab be kept in the
PROTECT position, and moved to the WRITE position only when you
wish to write new data onto the disk.
fig.DiskProtect.e.eps
Rear side of the disk
Write
(can write new data onto disk)
Write Protect Tab
Protect
(prevents writing to disk)
653
•
The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk. Should the
label come loose while the disk is in the drive, it may be difficult to
remove the disk.
654
•
Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and to protect
them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By using a dirty or dust-
ridden disk, you risk damaging the disk, as well as causing the disk
drive to malfunction.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Notes
Handling the CDs (CD-ROMs)
Copyright
851
•
When handling the discs, please observe the following.
•
Recording, duplication, distribution, sale, lease, performance, or
broadcast of copyrighted material (musical works, visual works,
broadcasts, live performances, etc.) belonging to a third party in part
or in whole without the permission of the copyright owner is
forbidden by law.
•
•
•
Do not touch the recording surface of the disc.
Do not use in dusty areas.
Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an enclosed vehicle.
801
•
852a
Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded surface)
of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may not be read properly.
Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner.
•
This product can be used to record or duplicate audio or visual
material without being limited by certain technological copy-
protection measures. This is due to the fact that this product is
intended to be used for the purpose of producing original music or
video material, and is therefore designed so that material that does
not infringe copyrights belonging to others (for example, your own
original works) can be recorded or duplicated freely.
•
•
•
•
Keep the disc in the case.
Do not keep the disc in the CD drive for a long time.
Do not put a sticker on the label of the disc.
853
•
Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright
held by a third party. We assume no responsibility whatsoever with
regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights arising through
your use of this unit.
Wipe the disc with a soft and dry cloth radially from inside to outside.
Do not wipe along circumference.
•
•
Do not use benzine, record cleaner spray or solvents of any kind.
Do not bend the disc. Bending discs may prevent proper reading and
writing of data, and may further result in malfunction.
Cautions when Using a CD
•
•
CDs that contain both music tracks and data will not play correctly.
For playback of commercially available CDs, this device supports
playback only for discs bearing the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO”
logo, which indicates the official CD standard. We cannot guarantee
that this device will correctly play discs that do not comply with the
CD standard, such as music discs that use copy-protection
technology.
203
*
GS (
) is a registered trademark of Roland Corporation.
) is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Add
*
XG lite (
•
•
•
The RM-700 is unable to play back music discs that use copy-
protection technology.
204
*
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
For details on music discs that use copy-protection technology,
please contact the distributor of the disc.
206e
*
The screen shots in this document are used in compliance with
the guidelines of the Microsoft Corporation.
You cannot save songs on a CD or delete a song from a CD, nor can
you format a CD.
206j
*
Windows® is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® operating
system.”
207
*
209
*
Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Inc.
*
This product uses certain software of the “Independent JPEG
Group.”
220
*
All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
238
*
MPEG Layer-3 audio compression technology is licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS Corporation and THOMSON Multimedia Corpo-
ration.
*
MMP (Moore Microprocessor Portfolio) refers to a patent
portfolio concerned with microprocessor architecture, which
was developed by Technology Properties Limited (TPL). Roland
has licensed this technology from the TPL Group.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
6
9
Duplex Scale (Duplex Scale) .................................................................. 31
Producing the Resonance of the Strings when the Keys Are
(Key Off Resonance).................................................................................. 32
Opening or Closing the Lid to Change the Resonance (Lid)...... 32
Tuning to Other Instruments’ Pitches (Master Tuning) ............... 32
Setting the Tuning Curve (Stretch Tuning)...................................... 33
Important Notes
Front Panel............................................................................................. 16
Bottom Panel (Rear)............................................................................ 18
Using Jazz Organ ....................................................................................... 37
(Layer).......................................................................................................38
Connect the Pedal Cable................................................................... 19
Connect the Speaker Cable.............................................................. 19
Connect the Power Cord................................................................... 19
(Octave Shift) .........................................................................................41
Setting Up the Music Rest ................................................................ 19
Folding Down the Music Rest................................................................ 19
Using the Music Holders.......................................................................... 19
Removing the Music Rest........................................................................ 20
Changing the Brightness of the Sound (Brilliance)..................45
Adding Liveliness to the Sound (Dynamics) ..............................46
Opening/Closing the Lid................................................................... 20
Installing Batteries in the Remote........................................................ 20
Turning the Power On/Off................................................................ 21
About the Pedals ................................................................................. 21
Adjusting the Volume........................................................................ 22
Selecting the Part to Which the Effect is Added (EffectsPart) ... 48
Using the Metronome ........................................................................49
Using the Metronome.............................................................................. 49
Changing the Metronome Settings.................................................... 49
Connecting Headphones.................................................................. 22
Attaching the Headphone Hook.......................................................... 23
Connecting USB Memory ................................................................. 23
Formatting the USB Memory................................................................. 24
Locking the External Memory Connector Cover ............................ 24
(One Touch Rhythm)...........................................................................54
Experiencing the RM-700 Demo.................................................... 26
Main Screens ......................................................................................... 27
Basic Screen ................................................................................................. 27
Leading Bass Function .......................................................................55
Performance
28
Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles (Style Search) ......... 60
Selecting an Music Style from USB Memory.................................... 61
Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano (One-Touch Piano) ......... 28
Creating Your Own Piano Sound (Piano Designer)................. 29
Playing Only the Rhythm of the Music Style..............................62
Changing the Tempo of the Automatic Accompaniment....62
Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment..............................63
Adjusting the Keyboard Touch (Key Touch) .................................... 30
Making Fine Adjustments to the Key Touch
(Key Touch Offset) ..................................................................................... 30
Changing the Timing of Sounds According to the Force
Used to Press the Keys (Hammer Response).................................... 30
Adjusting the Sound of Hammers Striking Strings
(Hammer Noise).......................................................................................... 30
Adjusting Resonance when the Damper Pedal is Depressed
(Damper Resonance) ................................................................................ 31
Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously When You
Play the Keyboard (Sync Start).............................................................. 63
Stopping Automatic Accompaniment .............................................. 64
Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro
(Countdown) ............................................................................................... 65
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and
Changing the Accompaniment Pattern (Auto Fill In/Break) ...... 66
Playing Songs Using the Lesson Functions (Visual Lesson)....99
Adding Harmony to the Right-Hand Part
Performances (Twin Piano)............................................................ 104
Changing the Way in Which the Sound is Heard
(Twin Piano Mode) ..................................................................................105
(Piano Style Arranger)........................................................................ 69
(Auto Sync DigiScore) ............................................................................108
Changing the Volume Balance Between the Accompaniment
Using the Sound of a Specific Part as a “Guide”
(Mute Volume)..........................................................................................117
Playing a Song ...................................................................................... 75
Viewing the Playing Hint......................................................................... 78
Placing a Marker within a Song ..........................................................118
Erasing a Marker.......................................................................................119
Moving a Marker......................................................................................119
Changing the Tempo (Playback Speed) of a Song.................. 82
How to Use the Remote Control........................................................... 83
Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back
(Transpose).......................................................................................... 122
Format Song (Center Cancel).......................................................... 85
Adding Harmony to Match the Song ................................................. 86
Modifying Your Voice (Transformer)................................................... 87
Adding Echo to Vocals (Echo)................................................................ 88
SMF Recording ................................................................................... 125
Recording a New Song (New Song)..................................................125
Recording With Accompaniment......................................................127
Recording Along With a Song.............................................................129
(Redoing Recordings).............................................................................131
Changing How Recording Stops........................................................132
Recording Songs Starting with Pickups ..........................................133
Saving Songs.............................................................................................134
Enjoying a Slide Show Along with Internal Songs or
VIMA TUNES................................................................................................. 90
Selecting the Type of Image Used for the Slide Show
(Picture Category)...................................................................................... 91
Watching a Slide Show with Digital Camera Photos..................... 92
Watching a Slide Show with Photos Saved on USB Memory..... 93
Audio Recording................................................................................ 136
Recording a New Song (New Song)..................................................136
Recording With Accompaniment......................................................138
Recording Along With a Song.............................................................140
Having the Image Change According to Your Performance
(Anime).................................................................................................... 94
Changing the Anime type ...................................................................... 95
Deleting Saved Songs...................................................................... 142
Copying Songs from USB Memory to “Favorites” ................. 143
Copying Songs from “Favorites” to USB Memory........................144
Watching the Notes while a Song Plays (Piano Roll) .............. 96
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Changing the Tempo Within the Song ..................................... 169
Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a Song .........................169
Preparing a CD-R Disc for Playback on Another CD Player
(Finalize)................................................................................................148
Saving Your Performance Settings
Storing a “User Program”................................................................150
Calling Up Saved User Programs .................................................151
Deleting Saved User Program Sets..............................................153
(Interval)......................................................................................................173
Synchronizing the Slide Show and Song (Sync)...........................173
Piano Roll Screen Settings ............................................................. 174
User Memory.......................................................................................153
Specifying the State of the Door of the Player Piano (Door) ...174
Displaying Bar Lines and Measure Numbers
(Measure Display) ....................................................................................174
(Viewpoint).................................................................................................174
Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the User Memory to
Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs (Pedal Shift) .............154
Sequential Loading of User Program Sets Stored
(Load Next).................................................................................................155
Changing the Timing at Which Arranger Settings are
PC Numbers ...............................................................................................155
Adjusting the Volume of the Backing Choir
(Backing Choir Level)..............................................................................175
Creating and Editing Songs
156
Tuning Settings.................................................................................. 176
Setting the Temperament Key............................................................177
Setting the Tuning Curve (Stretch Tuning)....................................177
Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer) .156
Modifying the Settings of Each Part..................................................157
Adjusting the Keyboard Touch (Key Touch)............................ 178
Recording While Erasing the Previous Recording
(Replace Recording)................................................................................159
Layering a Recording Over Previously Recorded Sounds
(Left Pedal/Center Pedal/Expression Pedal)............................ 179
Selecting the Bass Tone/Chord Tone......................................... 181
Hiding the Lyrics and Playing Hints ..................................................182
(Accomp Track).........................................................................................182
Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During
SMF Playback (Track Assign)................................................................182
Editing Songs ......................................................................................163
Basic Operation of the Editing Functions........................................163
Undoing Edits (Undo).............................................................................164
Correcting Timing Discrepancies (Quantize).................................165
Deleting Measures (Delete)..................................................................165
Inserting Blank Measures (Insert).......................................................166
Transposing Individual Parts (Transpose).......................................166
Making Measures Blank (Erase)...........................................................167
Exchanging Parts (Part Exchange).....................................................167
Correcting Notes One by One (Note Edit).......................................168
Modifying the Tone Changes in a Song (PC Edit).........................168
CD/Roland Audio Port Settings.................................................... 183
Setting the Type of CD to be Played Back (CD/Audio Type)....183
Synchronizing the Timing of the Piano and Accompaniment
(CD/Audio Sync).......................................................................................183
Specifying the Type of Signal at the Roland Audio Port
(Audio Port Mode)...................................................................................183
Synchronizing the Timing of the Signals from the Piano
and the Roland Audio Port (Audio Port Sync)...............................183
Switching the Remote Sensor On and Off (Ir Function)...... 184
Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song (Beat Map) ......169
Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs ................................169
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Remote Control Settings.................................................................184
Changing the [FUNC1] [FUNC2] Button Functions......................185
Error Messages ................................................................................... 206
Tone List ............................................................................................... 207
Drum Set List....................................................................................... 211
Effects List ............................................................................................ 217
Music Style List................................................................................... 218
Chord List............................................................................................. 220
Internal Song List ............................................................................. 222
Music Files That the RM-700 Can Use ........................................ 226
MIDI implementation Chart .......................................................... 227
Index ...................................................................................................... 230
Changing the Communication Settings for External Drive
(Instruction Mode).............................................................................187
Adding Background Music to the Auto Demo (BGM) ................187
Volume Settings.................................................................................188
Adjusting the Volume (Master Gain).................................................188
(Audio Rec Gain).......................................................................................188
Connecting External Devices
192
Connecting an External Display or Television.........................192
Connecting an External Display..........................................................192
Selecting the Video Output Destination (Output Select)..........195
Selecting the Screen that is Shown when Slide Show,
simpler, more concise instructions.
DigiScore, or Piano Roll are off (Video Out Mode).......................195
Connecting a Portable Audio Player ..........................................195
● Button names are enclosed in square brackets “[ ],” as in
Connecting MIDI Equipment.........................................................196
Using a MIDI Sequencer to Play the RM-700..................................196
Playing a MIDI Sound Module from the RM-700 ..........................197
MIDI Settings.......................................................................................197
Changing the MIDI Transmit Channel (Tx Channel)....................197
Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and Keyboard
(Local Control)...........................................................................................198
Sending Recorded Performance Data to a MIDI Device
(Composer MIDI Out)..............................................................................198
Sending Tone Change Messages
● An asterisk (*) or a
at the beginning of a paragraph
indicates a note or precaution. These should not be ignored.
● (p. **) refers to pages within the manual.
(Bank Select MSB/Bank Select LSB/Program Change)................198
Connecting Audio Equipment......................................................199
Playing the RM-700 through Connected Speakers .....................199
Playing the Sound of an Audio Device through the RM-700...199
Connecting Your Computer ..........................................................200
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
1
2
3
6
7 8
13
17
4
5
9
10 11 12 14 15 16 18
Front Panel
1. [Power] switch
11. [Intro/Ending] button
Pressed to switch the power on and off (p. 21).
Play an intro or ending during automatic accompaniment (p. 54).
2. [V-LINK] button
12. [Start/Stop] button
This button turns the V-LINK function on/off (p. 196).
Starts and stops automatic accompaniment (p. 63).
3. [Reverb] button
By holding down the [Intro/Ending] button and pressing the
63).
Adds reverberation to the sound (p. 42).
By holding down the [V-LINK] button and pressing the [Reverb]
button you can access the Demo screen (p. 26).
13. [Tone] buttons
Select the Tones that will be played from the keyboard (p. 34).
4. [Volume] knob
14. [User Program] button
Adjusts the overall volume (p. 22).
5. [Balance] knob
15. One Touch Program [Rhythm] button
Makes the optimal settings for playing with automatic
accompaniment (p. 54).
and for songs and accompaniments (p. 70).
6. Rhythm buttons
16. One Touch Program [Piano] button
Selects a Music Style for automatic accompaniment (p. 59).
Pressing the [User] button selects a User Style that you’ve made
yourself or a Music Style on external memory (p. 61).
Makes the optimal settings for a piano performance (p. 28).
17. [Anime] button
7. [Auto Fill In] button
This button lets you change the image in time with your
A fill-in will automatically be added when you press a [Variation]
button to change the accompaniment or Rhythm arrangement (p.
66).
performance (p. 94).
18. [Slide Show] button
This button switches to the slide show screen (p. 90).
8. [Arranger] button
19. [Piano Roll] button
This button turns the Arranger function on/off (p. 62).
This button switches to the piano roll screen (p. 96).
9. Variation [1]–[4] buttons
20. Touch Screen
Pressed to switch the arrangement of the accompaniment (p. 66).
This lets you perform a variety of operations just by touching the
10. [Break] button
screen.
Stop the Rhythm at the end of that measure (Break; p. 66).
21. [DigiScore] button
This button switches to the musical score display (p. 106).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
20
21
24
27 28
30
31
32 34
22
23 25 26
29
33 35
36
37
22. [Song] button
32. [
(Prev)] button
This button switches to the song select screen. You can select a
Returns the song playback start location to the beginning of the
song, or rewinds the song (p. 76).
song by touching in the screen (p. 75).
23. [One Touch Song] button
33. [
(Play/Stop)] button
This button turns the One Touch Song function on/off (p. 52).
24. [Value] dial
34. [ (Rec)] button
Use this to change on-screen values.
standby (p. 125, p. 136).
25. [Exit] button
35. [
(Next)] button
Pressed to exit the currently displayed screen.
Selects the next song, or fast-forwards the playback (p. 76).
26. [Menu] button
36. Infrared Receiver
This button switches to the Menu screen.
Point the remote control at this sensor when using the remote
27. [Metronome] button
control to operate the RM-700 (p. 83).
Activates the built-in metronome (p. 49).
37. External Memory connector
28. [Count] button
Connects an USB memory to play (p. 75) and save songs (p. 134).
You can change the count settings (p. 115).
*
*
Be sure to close the cover of the External Memory connector after
connecting USB memory to the External Memory connector.
29. Tempo [Slow] [Fast] buttons
Adjusts the tempo (p. 113).
cannot be guaranteed if other external memory products are used.
original tempo.
30. [Track] buttons
Used to play back or record each track of a song (p. 77, p. 116, p.
131).
If a music CD or audio/MP3 format song is selected, you can use the
[Right] button to turn the Center Cancel function on/off (p. 85).
31. [Transpose] button
Transposes the pitch of the keyboard or the song being played (p.
122).
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
Bottom Panel (Rear)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
*
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5/7; sold separately). By
malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
1. Speaker connector
Connect the speaker cable of the stand (p. 19).
2. Analog RGB Out connector
5. Input jacks R, L /Mono
Connect an external display (p. 192).
These jacks can be connected to another sound generating device
or an audio device, so that the sound of that device will be output
from the RM-700’s speakers (p. 199).
*
This cannot be used simultaneously with the Video Out jack.
3. Video Out jack
Connect a television here (p. 193).
6. Output jacks R, L/Mono
*
This cannot be used simultaneously with the Analog RGB Out
connector.
These jacks can be connected to your audio system to enjoy more
powerful sound. Or, you can connect recording equipment and
record your performances (p. 199).
4. Control Pedal jack
You can connect the expression pedal here and use it as a volume
pedal, or you can assign a variety of other functions for the pedal to
control (p. 192).
7. Pedal connector
Connect the pedal cable of the stand to this connector (p. 19).
8. AC In
Connect the included power cord here (p. 19).
Bottom Panel (Front Left/Right)
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
Front Left
Front Right
1. Phones jacks
6. Roland Audio Port Volume knob
This knob adjusts the volume of the input from the Roland Audio
two headphones simultaneously (p. 22).
Port (p. 195).
2. Mic Volume knob
7. Roland Audio Port
Adjusts the volume level for the microphone (p. 25).
Here you can connect a portable audio player or similar device (p.
195).
3. Mic jack
8. Ext Drive connector
Used for connecting microphones (p. 25).
Connect a USB CD drive here (p. 25).
4. MIDI Out/In connectors
*
*
Use the separately sold CD-01A.
These can be connected to an external MIDI device to exchange
A floppy disk drive (FD-01; sold separately) can also be connected
here.
performance data (p. 196).
5. USB connector
You can connect a computer and exchange performance data
between the instrument and the computer (p. 200).
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
Connect the Pedal Cable
Setting Up the Music Rest
1. Insert the pedal cable into the Pedal connector on the
rear bottom panel of the RM-700.
1. Grasping the music rest with both hands, lift it toward
you until its in the upright position.
2. Use the support on the back of the music rest to keep the
stand in place.
Pedal cable
The angle of the music rest can be set to any of three positions.
1
2
Connect the Speaker Cable
Folding Down the Music Rest
1. As shown in the diagram, connect the speaker cable
leading from the speaker box of the stand to the speaker
connector located on the rear bottom panel of the RM-
700.
1. Raise the support located on the back of the music rest,
then gently fold down the music rest.
Push the speaker cable in until it clicks into position.
Using the Music Holders
You can use the holders to hold pages in place.
When not using the holders, leave them folded down.
Push
Push
Speaker cable
Connect the Power Cord
1. Insert the included power cord into the AC inlet on the
rear bottom panel of the RM-700, and then plug it into an
electrical outlet.
Be sure to use the supplied power cord.
To
AC outlet
Power cord
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
Removing the Music Rest
Installing Batteries in the Remote
Install the included batteries (two) into the remote control unit.
Remote (rear)
You can remove the music rest from the piano.
This allows you to place a notebook computer or an external display
on the piano.
1. Position the music rest so it’s upright, then remove the
three screws, as shown.
You can remove the screws using a coin.
Battery cover
•
Be careful not to lose the screws that you removed from the music
rest, or put them where they might be swallowed by small children.
1. Slide the cover located on the rear of the remote to open
it.
2. Insert the two LR6 (AA) type batteries in the orientation
shown on the remote.
Opening/Closing the Lid
*
Be sure to observe the correct polarity (+, -) for each battery.
1. To open the lid, use both hands to lift it lightly, and slide
it away from yourself.
3. Slide the cover closed.
2. To close the lid, pull it gently toward yourself, and lower
it softly after it has been fully extended.
•
If used improperly, batteries may explode or leak and cause damage
or injury. In the interest of safety, please read and observe the
following precautions.
•
•
•
Avoid using new batteries together with used ones. In addition,
avoid mixing different types of batteries.
Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to remain unused for
an extended period of time.
If a battery has leaked, use a soft piece of cloth or paper towel to
wipe all remnants of the discharge from the battery
compartment. Then install new batteries. To avoid inflammation
of the skin, make sure that none of the battery discharge gets
onto your hands or skin. Exercise the utmost caution so that none
of the discharge gets near your eyes. Immediately rinse the
affected area with running water if any of the discharge has
entered the eyes.
•
•
When opening and closing the lid, be careful not to let your fingers
get caught. If small children will be using the RM-700, adult
supervision should be provided.
•
Never keep batteries together with metallic objects such as
ballpoint pens, necklaces, hairpins, etc.
If you need to move the piano, make sure the lid is closed first to
prevent accidents.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
Turning the Power On/Off
About the Pedals
The pedals have the following functions, and are used mainly for
piano performance.
Once the connections have been completed, turn on power to
your various devices in the order specified. By turning on
devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/
or damage to speakers and other devices.
Turning the Power On
1. Turn the [Volume] knob all the way to the left to
minimize the volume.
Soft Pedal
Damper Pedal
Sostenuto Pedal
2. Press the [Power] switch.
Damper pedal (right pedal)
Lower
position
Upward
position
While this pedal is pressed, notes will be sustained even after you
take your fingers off the keys.
ON
OFF
The length of the sustain changes subtly according to the extent to
which the pedal is depressed.
On an acoustic piano, holding down the damper pedal will allow the
remaining strings to resonate in sympathy with the sounds that you
played from the keyboard, adding a rich resonance.
The RM-700 simulates this damper resonance.
You can modify the sound of the damper releasing the string
and the sound of the sympathetic vibration. Refer to the Piano
Designer function (p. 29) settings “Damper Noise” and
“Damper Resonance.”
The power will turn on, several images will appear in the RM-700’s
screen, and then the Piano screen (p. 27) will appear.
Sostenuto pedal (center pedal)
This pedal sustains only the sounds of the keys that were already
After a brief interval, the RM-700 will be ready to produce sound
when you play the keyboard.
Soft pedal (left pedal)
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval
(a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will
operate normally.
When you hold down this pedal and play the keyboard, the sound
will have a softer tone.
The softness of the sound changes subtly depending on the extent
to which the pedal is depressed.
3. Use the [Volume] knob to adjust the volume (p. 22).
You can switch the function of the sostenuto pedal. Refer to
“Assigning the Function of the Pedals (Left Pedal/Center Pedal/
Expression Pedal)” (p. 179)
Turning the Power Off
1. Turn the [Volume] knob all the way to the left to
minimize the volume.
2. Press the [Power] switch.
The screen will disappear, and the power will turn off.
If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the
[Power] switch, then unplug the power cord from the power
outlet. Refer to “Power Supply” (p. 9).
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
About the Adjuster
Connecting Headphones
When you move the RM-700 or if you feel that the pedals are
unstable, adjust the adjuster located below the pedals as follows.
You can use headphones to enjoy the RM-700 without disturbing
those around you, such as at night. Since the RM-700 has two
headphone jacks, two people can also use headphones
simultaneously.
•
Rotate the adjuster to lower it so that it is in firm contact with the
floor. If there is a gap between the pedals and the floor, the pedals
may be damaged. In particular when placing the instrument on
carpet, adjust this so that the pedals firmly contact the floor.
If you’re using only one set of headphones, you may connect them
to either of the two headphone jacks.
Adjuster
Adjusting the Volume
Here’s how to adjust the overall volume
If headphones are connected, use the [Volume] knob to adjust the
headphone volume.
bottom left of the piano.
1. Turn the [Volume] knob to adjust the overall volume.
If headphones are connected, no sound will be output from the RM-
700’s speakers.
2. Use the RM-700’s [Volume] knob to adjust the
headphone volume.
•
If the Twin Piano mode is set to “Individual,” separate sounds will be
heard from each Phones jack (p. 105).
•
•
Use Stereo headphones.
To prevent damage to the cord’s internal conductors, avoid rough
handling. When using headphones, mainly try to handle either the
plug or the headset.
•
•
You can also use the remote control to adjust the volume. Refer to
“Button Functions” (p. 84).
•
•
Your headphones may be damaged if the volume of a device is
already turned up when you plug them in. Minimize the volume
before you plug in the headphones.
Excessive input will not only damage your hearing, but may also
strain the headphones. Please enjoy music at an appropriate
volume.
Even if the [Volume] knob is raised, you won’t hear any sound if the
volume has been set to “0” using the remote’s VOLUME [-] [+]
buttons or if the [MUTE] button was pressed.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
Attaching the Headphone Hook
Connecting USB Memory
Whenever you are not using the headphones, you can hang them
on the headphone hook of the RM-700.
You can connect USB memory to the External Memory connector,
and play back songs that were saved on the USB memory. Songs
you’ve recorded on the RM-700 can also be saved to USB memory.
Use USB memory sold by Roland. We cannot guarantee
operation if any other USB memory is used.
1. Press the External Memory connector cover and open the
cover.
Hole
Press the cover in; the cover will open.
Wing nut
Headphone hook
1. Press and twist the headphone hook included with the
RM-700 into the hole in the bottom left of the RM-700
(refer to the figure above).
2. Turn the headphone hook wing nut to secure the
headphone hook.
2. Connect the USB memory to the External Memory
connector.
•
Do not hang anything other than headphones on the headphone
hook. Doing so may damage the instrument or the hook.
Make sure that the memory is plugged in all the way. Do not
use excessive force.
3. Press the cover in again to close the cover.
•
Always keep the External Memory connector cover closed except
when connecting and disconnecting external memory.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
5. Touch < Execute >.
Formatting the USB Memory
A confirmation message appears.
Before using newly purchased USB memory, you’ll need to format
(initialize) it on the RM-700.
1. Press the [Song] button, getting indicator to light.
The Song selection screen appears.
*
If you want to quit the initialization, touch < Cancel >.
6. Touch < OK >.
Initialization of the USB memory begins.
2. Touch < File >.
•
Never disconnect the USB memory or turn off the power while the
“Formatting...” indication is shown.
The “Song File Menu” screen appears.
Locking the External Memory Connector
Cover
To prevent theft or loss of the USB memory connected to the
External Memory connector, you can lock the External Memory
connector cover.
1. Press the External Memory connector cover to close the
cover.
3. Touch < Format Media >.
2. Secure the lock using the anti-theft lock screws included
with the instrument.
4. Touch
to select “Ext Memory.”
•
Take care not to lose the anti-theft lock screws. Also be sure to use
only the included screws to secure the anti-theft lock.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
Connecting a Microphone
Connecting a CD Drive
You can connect a microphone to the Mic jack, and enjoy sing-
alongs or tell a story while you play.
You can connect a separately available CD drive (CD-01A) and play
back music CDs or CD-ROMs containing SMF music data. You can
also write songs for which the audio has been recorded to a CD to
create a music CD.
You can also play songs on VIMA TUNES (VIMA CD-ROMs) sold
by Roland.
Attaching a CD Drive
1. Turn the CD drive’s power “AUTO.”
2. Use the screws (3 x 8 mm) to attach the holders to the CD
drive.
1. Connect a microphone (sold separately) to the Mic jack
on the lower-left area of the instrument.
2. Rotate the [Mic Volume] knob on left side of the Mic jack
to adjust the volume level for the microphone.
Some Notes on Using a Microphone
•
Be careful of high volume levels when using microphone late at
night or early in the morning.
Screws (3 x 8 mm)
•
When connecting a microphone to the RM-700, be sure to lower the
volume. If the volume control is too high when the microphone is
plugged in, noise may be produced by the speakers.
3. As shown in the illustration, fasten the CD drive using the
screws (4 x 16 mm) and the screw holes located on the
bottom of the RM-700.
•
Howling could be produced depending on the location of
microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by:
•
•
•
Changing the orientation of the microphone.
Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers.
Lowering volume levels.
Screws (4 x 16 mm)
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
4. Use a USB cable to connect the CD drive’s USB connector
to the Ext Drive connector on the RM-700’s front bottom
panel.
Experiencing the RM-700 Demo
You can experience three different demos that introduce the most
important functions.
1. While holding down the [V-LINK] button, press the
[Reverb] button.
USB cable
The demo menu screen appears.
5. Connect the AC adaptor included with the CD drive to the
CD drive’s DC IN jack.
2. Touch the demo that you want to experience.
To AC outlet
Cord hook
The demo image will appear in the RM-700’s display.
*
If you touch < Play All >, the three demos will continue playing
consecutively until you press the [Exit] button.
AC adaptor
3. To end the demo, press the [Exit] button.
Power cord
•
•
All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for purposes
other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable
laws.
Place the AC adaptor so the side with the indicator (see illustration)
faces upwards and the side with textual information faces
downwards.
The indicator will light when you plug the AC adaptor into an AC
outlet.
You can set things so the Demo starts playing automatically. For
details, see “Automatically Starting the Demo (Auto Start)” (p. 187).
6. Connect the AC adaptor to an AC outlet.
To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your unit
(should the plug be pulled out accidentally), and to avoid
applying undue stress to the AC adaptor jack, anchor the
power cord using the cord hook, as shown in the illustration.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Start Playing
Main Screens
Piano Screen
Immediately after the power is turned on, the Piano screen is
displayed.
The Piano screen will also appear when you press the One Touch
Program [Piano] button.
Basic Screen
From the Piano screen, you can touch <Basic Screen> to access the
Basic screen.
The Tone names are selected appear
The last-selected
song or Music Style
Beat
Tempo
Measure
Transpostion value
Functions for automatic accompaniment
Follow either of the procedures described below to display it.
•
•
From the Piano screen, press the [Tone] button and then press
the [Exit] button.
Press the One Touch Program [Rhythm] button.
The Basic screen appears and the settings are made for automatic
accompaniment.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano (One-Touch Piano)
You can create the optimal settings for a piano performance with the press of a single button.
Thanks to the superb playing feel of its ivory feel keyboard, and its high-quality, grand piano sounds, the RM-700 allows you to
experience piano performance as it truly should be.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
The Piano screen appears.
When you press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, the RM-700 will switch to the following settings, regardless of the current
panel settings.
•
•
•
•
The piano sound “Superior Grd” will be selected.
If the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections (p. 39), the keyboard returns to a single section.
The pedals return to their usual functions (p. 21).
The effect is automatically set to “Damper Resonance” (p. 31).
•
Since this instrument faithfully reproduces real acoustic piano action and response, keys played in the top one-and-one-half-octave
range continue to resonate, regardless of the damper pedal action, and the tone in this range is audibly different. The Transpose
setting (p. 122) can also be used to change the range that is unaffected by the damper pedal.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Creating Your Own Piano Sound (Piano Designer)
The RM-700 lets you make detailed adjustments to the piano sound as desired. This function is called “Piano Designer.”
Some of the “Piano Designer” functions apply only to specific sounds.
You can use the Memory Backup operation (p. 189) to store the “Piano Designer” settings in internal memory.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
The Piano screen appears.
2. Touch <Piano Designer>.
The “Piano Designer” screen appears.
3. Touch <Keyboard>–<Tuning>.
4. To change the setting, touch
for the item you want to specify.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Changing the Timing of Sounds According
to the Force Used to Press the Keys
(Hammer Response)
Keyboard
This adjusts how your playing strength will affect the timing at
which the note sounds. This is called the “Hammer Response”
function.
On an acoustic piano, pressing a key moves a hammer, which strikes
a string to produce sound. If you press the key softly, the hammer
will move slowly, meaning that it will take slightly longer (in
comparison to a strongly-played note) from the moment you press
the key until the sound is produced.
If the Hammer Response function is turned on, the time between
the moment you press a key until the sound is heard will change
depending on the strength with which you play. As you play more
softly, this time will become longer.
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
*
This setting applies to all tones.
Adjusting the Keyboard Touch (Key Touch)
Setting
Explanation
Higher settings will produce slower response. The
Hammer Response function is not active when the
value is set to “Off.”
You can adjust the touch (playing feel) of the keyboard.
Off, 1–10
*
This setting applies to all tones.
Setting
Explanation
The sound plays at one set volume, regardless of the
force used to play the keys.
Fixed
Super Light
This setting produces the lightest keyboard touch.
Adjusting the Sound of Hammers Striking
Strings (Hammer Noise)
You can achieve fortissimo (ff) play with a less
forceful touch than usual, so the keyboard feels
lighter. This setting makes it easy to play, even for
children.
Light
You can adjust the sound produced when the hammer of an
acoustic piano strikes the string.
This sets the standard keyboard touch. You can play
with the most natural touch. This is the closest to the
touch of an acoustic piano.
Medium
Setting
-2–0–2
Explanation
You have to finger the keyboard more forcefully than
usual in order to play fortissimo (ff), so the keyboard
touch feels heavier. Dynamic fingering adds even
more feeling to what you play.
Higher settings will produce a louder sound of the
hammer striking the string.
Heavy
Super Heavy
This setting produces the heaviest keyboard touch.
You can touch <Demo> to access the demo screen.
By touching the screen you can hear the change in the sound
produced by the different settings.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen.
Making Fine Adjustments to the Key Touch
(Key Touch Offset)
This lets you make further detailed adjustments to the keyboard
sensitivity as appropriate for the strength of your fingers.
*
This setting applies to all tones.
Setting
-10–0–9
Explanation
Higher settings will produce a heavier playing feel.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Adjusting the Sympathetic Vibrations of an
Acoustic Piano’s Duplex Scale (Duplex Scale)
Resonance
“Duplex Scale” refers to a system that causes sympathetic
vibrations in the sections of the string toward the front and toward
the back.
It can produce sound that is richer and brighter by adding the
string’s higher harmonics.
Because no damper (sound-stopping mechanism) is applied to the
front or back sections of the string, the resonating sounds linger
even after the sound of the string stops when you release the
played key.
Setting
Explanation
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
Higher settings will make the sympathetic vibration
louder.
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
Off, 1–10
The Duplex Scale function is not active when the value
is set to “Off.”
Adjusting Resonance when the Damper
Pedal is Depressed (Damper Resonance)
You can touch <Demo> to access the demo screen.
By touching the screen you can hear the change in the sound
produced by the different settings.
You can change the volume of the damper pedal resonance.
On an acoustic piano, depressing the damper pedal makes the
notes you play resonate with other strings, adding rich
reverberations and fatness to the sound. The damper pedal on the
RM-700 recreates this resonance (Damper Resonance) when
depressed.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen.
Producing the Resonance of the Strings when
the Keys Are Played (String Resonance)
Setting
Explanation
When you play the keys on an acoustic piano, the strings that are
already playing resonate as well. The function that reproduces this
effect is called “String Resonance.”
The resonance volume decreases as the value is
lowered, while raising the value increases the volume
of the Damper Resonance.
The Damper Resonance function is not active when the
value is set to “Off.”
Off, 1–10
Setting
Explanation
The resonance level decreases as the value is
decreased, while increasing the value increases the
amount of resonance.
The String Resonance function is not active when the
value is set to “Off.”
You can touch <Demo> to access the demo screen.
By touching the screen you can hear the change in the sound
produced by the different settings.
Off, 1–10
Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen.
You can touch <Demo> to access the demo screen.
By touching the screen you can hear the change in the sound
produced by the different settings.
Adjusting the Sound Heard at String Release
When the Damper Pedal is Depressed
(Damper Noise)
Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen.
You can adjust the damper noise of the acoustic piano sound (the
sound of the damper releasing the strings when you press the
damper pedal).
This setting is ignored when Damper Resonance is set to “Off.”
Setting
Explanation
Larger values produce correspondingly greater
damper noise.
The Damper Noise function is not active when the
value is set to “Off.”
Off, 1–10
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Playing Sounds When the Keys Are Released
(Key Off Resonance)
Tuning
You can play the “key off” sound (the subtle sound produced when
the keys are released) obtained when playing an acoustic piano.
Setting
Explanation
The volume of the Key Off sound decreases as the value
is lowered, while raising the value increases the volume
of the Key Off sound.
Off, 1–10
The Key Off Resonance function is not active when the
value is set to “Off.”
You can touch <Demo> to access the demo screen.
By touching the screen you can hear the change in the sound
produced by the different settings.
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen.
Tuning to Other Instruments’ Pitches
(Master Tuning)
Opening or Closing the Lid to Change the
Resonance (Lid)
In situations such as when playing ensemble with other
instruments, you can tune the RM-700’s standard pitch to the pitch
of another instrument.
Adjusts the extent to which the lid of the grand piano is open.
The standard pitch generally refers to the pitch of the note that’s
played when you finger the middle A key.
Setting
0–6
Explanation
As the value decreases, the lid seems to close more,
producing a softer sound. increasing the value opens
the lid more, producing a brighter sound.
This tuning of all the instruments to a standard pitch is called
“Master Tuning.”
*
This setting applies to all tones.
You can also adjust the openness of the lid by touching
in the Piano screen or the Piano Designer screen. Doing so will
also change the Lid setting.
Setting
415.3 Hz–440.0 Hz–466.2 Hz
Changing the Tuning (Temperament)
You can play classical styles such as Baroque using historic
temperaments (tuning methods).
Most modern songs are composed for and played in equal
temperament, the most common tuning in use today. But at one
time, there were a wide variety of other tuning systems in existence.
By playing in the temperament that was in use when a composition
was created, you can experience the sonorities of chords originally
intended for that song.
*
This setting applies to all tones.
Setting
Equal
Explanation
This temperament divides the octave into 12
equal parts. All intervals will be slightly out of tune
by the same amount.
This temperament makes the 5th and 3rd intervals
pure. It is unsuitable for playing melodies and
modulation is not possible, but it produces
beautifully harmonious chords.
Just Major
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Setting
Explanation
Setting the Tuning Curve (Stretch Tuning)
Just intonation differs between major and minor
keys. The same results as major can be obtained in
a minor key.
Just Minor
Arabic
Touch <Stretch Tuning> to access the Stretch Tuning screen.
This tuning is suitable for the music of Arabia.
This temperament is a modification of meantone
temperament and just intonation, allowing more
freedom of modulation. It allows you to play in all
keys (third method).
Kirnberger
Meantone
This temperament is a partial compromise of just
intonation in order to allow modulation.
This temperament is based on the theories of the
Greek philosopher Pythagoras, and has pure
fourths and fifths. Chords containing a third will
sound impure, but melodies will sound good.
Pythagorean
This temperament is a combination of meantone
and Pythagorean temperaments. It allows you to
play in all keys. (First method, number three.)
Pianos are generally tuned so that the low range is flatter and the
high range is sharper than equal tempered pitches. This method of
tuning is unique to the piano, and is known as “stretched tuning.”
Werckmeister
A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning compared
with the changes in equal temperament pitch is called a tuning
curve.
Changing the tuning curve produces subtle variations in the
reverberations of the chords you play.
Setting the Temperament Key
When playing with tuning other than equal temperament, you need
to specify the tonic note for tuning the song to be performed (that
is, the note that corresponds to C for a major key or to A for a minor
key).
Stretch Tuning
Setting
Explanation
Specifies whether Stretch Tuning will be used (On) or
not used (Off).
If you choose an equal temperament, there’s no need to select a
tonic note.
On, Off
*
*
This setting applies to all tones.
Type
Setting
Setting
Preset
Explanation
C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab, A, Bb, B
This is the tuning curve pre-specified for the RM-700.
This is the tuning curve modified by the user.
You can choose from fourteen different tuning curves.
User
When performing in ensemble with other instruments, be aware
that depending on the key, there may be some shifting of the pitch.
Tune the RM-700 to the fundamental pitch of the other instruments.
Type1–14
Tuning
Setting
-50–+50
Explanation
Adjusts the pitch of the specified key.
Edit Key
Setting
Explanation
To specify the key whose pitch you want to adjust, play
it on the keyboard.
A0–C8
If you touch <Fix> so it’s lit, this will be fixed at the
currently selected key.
This lets you tune while listening to the sound.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Performing with a Variety of Tones (Tone Buttons)
The RM-700 comes with a many built-in instrument sounds and effects. This lets you enjoy perform in a wide range of musical styles.
The built-in sounds are called “Tones.” The sounds are organized into five tone groups, which are assigned to the Tone buttons.
For more about the names of Tones, take a look at the “Tone List” (p. 207).
1. Press any one of the Tone buttons to select a tone group.
You’ll see that button’s indicator light up. The screen displays the tone names included in the tone group you’ve selected.
*
If you press the [Others] button, additional tone groups will be displayed. Touch an icon to select the desired tone group.
Tone
gruop
This screen is called the “Tone selection screen.”
2. Touch a tone name to select the tone.
•
•
•
Tones indicated by
Tones indicated by
Tones indicated by red
is called an “EX voice.” These voices are especially recommended.
is 88 keys stereo multi-sampling piano tones.
or
mark produce the “Key Off Sound.” What “Key Off Sound” does is recreate the tonal changes
•
•
Touch the page icons to change pages.
If you touch <Alphabetical>, the sounds will be shown in alphabetical order. However, even when sorted in alphabetical order, the
piano sound “Superior Grd” will be shown in first place.
•
•
•
•
You can touch <Demo> for an audio demonstration of a particular tone.
You can touch <Effects> to make settings for the effects applied to each sound (p. 47).
You can do searches for tones according to search parameters or by name by touching <Search> (p. 35).
If a VIMA TUNES song is selected (p. 75), you'll be able to select <VIMA TUNES> as the tone group.
If you select <VIMA TUNES> as the tone group, you’ll be able to select recommended tones.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Using Keywords to Search for Tones (Tone Search)
You can search for tones that match the conditions you set for instrument or musical style. You can also search the tones using the first
character of the tone name.
1. Press any Tone button.
The tone selection screen appears.
2. Touch <Search>.
The “Tone Search” screen appears.
Searching by Conditions
3. Touch <Category> or <Genre>, then use the [Value] dial to select the search conditions.
In condition search, tones satisfying all of the selected search criteria are sought.
4. Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display. Touch the tone name to select the tone.
Searching by Tone Name
3. Touch <By Name>.
Touch <By Key> to go to the condition search screen.
4. Decide which character is to be used for the search.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you’re searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession cycles you through the available choices in that
character group (“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.
5. Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display. Touch the tone name to select the Tone.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Using Super Tones
Here’s how to select particularly recommended sounds in addition to the sounds you select by pressing a button.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Play>.
3. Touch <Super Tones>.
A screen like the following will appear.
•
•
•
Touch
Touch
to select the musical genre.
to select other sounds in the same genre.
Touch Rotary <SLOW> <FAST> to change the speed of the rotary effect (p. 37).
The sounds are organized into the following genres.
Organ
Split Set
Select these to play with organ
Tones.
These let you play with
different Tones on the right
and left sides of the keyboard.
Pedal EX Tone
Drum
These Tones change when the
left pedal is pressed.
Select these to play with
percussioninstrumentsounds.
A different percussion
instrument plays with each key
you press.
EX Tone
SOUND EFFECT
These are truly realistic sounds
which can reproduce even the
finest nuances of a particular
instrument’s expressive
capabilities.
These produce special effects.
A different sound effect is
produced with each key you
press.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Using Jazz Organ
1. Select Jazz Organ, and touch <Footage>.
The following screen appears.
Selects the User tones
Saves the data to User memory
This changes the speed of the rotary effect
Switches the presets
Plays the
percussion sounds
Switches the parts
Footage
Touch here and drag up or down to alter the tone of a footage,
you can create the organ Tone you want with the footage
PRESET
USER
You can choose from four different pre-specified footage settings.
You can recall footage settings that you’ve created.
When you touch <WRITE>, the footage settings at that time will be written.
You can use PERCUSSION <4> or <2 2/3> to change the tone when it is played.
Touching PERCUSSION <FAST DECAY> makes the accent time shorter.
PERCUSSION
This adds a sort of spinning effect to the organ sound, similar to the sound when a rotary speaker is used.
Changing the speed increases or decreases the speed of this spinning effect.
ROTARY
PART
Selects the part to which the footage settings will be added.
A device for combining different frequencies to create a desired sound is called “Footage.”
The numbers displayed originally referred to the lengths of the pipes on a pipe organ. The length of pipe used
to produce the reference pitch (the fundamental) for the keyboard is eight feet.
Reducing the pipe to half its length produces a pitch one octave higher; conversely, doubling the pipe length
creates a pitch one octave lower. Therefore, a pipe producing a pitch one octave below that of the reference of
8’ (eight feet) would be 16’; for one octave above the reference, the pipe would be 4’, and to take the pitch up
yet another octave it would be shortened to 2’.
Footage
Try experimenting by touching different icons to change the tone, and find one you like.
*
When all bars are pushed in all the way (0), there will be no sound when you play the keyboard.
If PERCUSSION is on, the “1’” footage will not be heard.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Performing with Multiple Sounds Layered Together (Layer)
By using the “Layer” feature, you can play two or more tones at the same time.
For instance, it’s possible to play the Tones for both Piano and Strings simultaneously.
Superior Grd
Decay Str3
Ballad Bells
1. In the Basic screen, touch <Layer 1>.
The tone that was sounding before you switched to layer performance, plus the tone indicated in the lower part of the display, are
now played together.
display is called the “layer tone.”
In the same manner, you can touch <Layer 2> to layer further sounds.
Changing the Tones
2. Touch the name of the tone to be changed.
Touch here to highlight the tone name.
3. Press a Tone button to select the new tone (p. 34).
4. When you have selected the tone, press the [Exit] button.
The display returns to the Basic screen.
5. Touch <Layer 1>.
Touch <Layer 2> to have <Layer 2> play as well.
The <Layer 1> and <Layer 2> icons are dimmed, and the Layer performance is cancelled.
Now when you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.
•
You can change the balance of the upper tone and layer tone volume. For instructions, refer to “Adjusting the Volume Balance for
Each Performance Part (Part Balance)” (p. 70).
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands (Split)
Dividing the keyboard into right-hand and left-hand areas, then playing different sounds in each section is called “split performance.”
The boundary key is called the “split point.”
The split point key is included in the left-hand keyboard area. Each time power to the keyboard is turned on, the split point is reset to
“F#3.”
Split Point
Wild Ac.Bs
Superior Grd
You can change the split point; refer to “Changing the Keyboard’s Split Point (Split Point)” (p. 178).
1. In the Basic screen, touch <Split>.
The tone sounding prior to the split performance is played in the right-hand section of the keyboard, and the tone indicated at the left
of the screen is played in the left-hand section of the keyboard.
Here, the tone appearing at the upper of the display is called the “upper tone,” and the tone appearing at the lower of the display is
called the “lower tone.”
You can turn the tones on and off by touching <Lower 1> or <Lower 2>.
Changing the Tones
2. Touch the name of the tone to be changed.
3. Press a Tone button to select the tone (p. 34).
4. When you have selected the tone, press the [Exit] button.
The display returns to the Basic screen.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Cancelling the Split
The <Split> icons are dimmed, and the Split performance is cancelled.
When you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.
•
•
You can change the volume balance between the upper and lower parts of the keyboard; refer to “Adjusting the Volume Balance
for Each Performance Part (Part Balance)” (p. 70).
When the keyboard has been divided into upper and lower sections, the damper pedal is applied to only the upper section. If you
want to add lingering reverberations to the notes of the lower section, refer to “Assigning the Function of the Pedals (Left Pedal/
Center Pedal/Expression Pedal)” (p. 179).
Turning On Layer and Split Performance Simultaneously
Turning on either Layer Performance or Split Performance allows you to divide the keyboard into a upper and a lower part and play
with two Tones layered in the lower part, and three Tones layered in the upper part.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave Shift)
When using layer performance (p. 38*) or split performance (p. 39), you can change the pitch of the keyboard’s sound in octave units.
This function is called “Octave Shift.”
For example, when playing a Layer performance, if you change the pitch of one of the tones and then layer it, it changes the
impression created with the tone.
You can’t change the Octave Shift setting for Upper unless you’re using Split performance.
1. In the Basic screen, touch <Layer1> or <Split>.
The RM-700 switches to layer performance or split performance.
2. To apply Octave Shift, touch the name of the tone you’ve selected.
3. Press the Tone button to display the Tone selection screen.
4. In the lower left of the screen, touch <Octave>.
The “Octave Shift” screen appears.
5. Touch
to adjust the pitch of the sound.
The sound can be changed from two octaves lower than the original sound (-2) to two octaves above the original (+2).
*
If you touch <Reset>, the setting will return to its factory-set value.
6. When you’ve specified the desired value, touch <OK>.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb)
Apply a reverb effect to the notes you play with the RM-700.
Reverb makes it sound as if you are playing in a concert hall.
1. Press the [Reverb] button so its indicator is lit.
The “Reverb” screen appears.
2. Touch an icon to select the performance space.
*
Touch
to switch between screens.
;
Display
Hall1
Explanation
Hall with bright reverberation
Hall with warm reverberation
Room reverberation
Hall2
Room1
Cathedral
Ground
Room2
High-ceilinged cathedral
Wide open space with no reverberations
Small room
Lounge
Studio
Larger room
A recording studio
Gymnasium
Hall3
In a gymnasium
Large concert hall reverberation
A domed ballpark
Dome
Cave
Adds the extended reverberations found inside a cave
GS Room1
GS Room2
GS Room3
GS Hall1
GS Hall2
GS Plate
GS Delay
GS Pan Delay
Reproduces an indoor-type reverb.
Provides a clear, expansive reverberation.
Reproduces the reverberation found in a hall. Gives reverberation with a greater sense of depth than GS Room.
Reproduces a plate echo (reverberation created using the vibrations of a metal plate).
A delayed sound that is added to the original, similar to the reflected sounds of mountain echoes.
The reflected sounds are panned (shifted) laterally.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
3. Touch the slider beneath the icons to adjust the effect selected.
Touch and slide the knob on the screen to the right for a deeper reverb, and to the left for less.
You can also move the slider with the [Value] dial.
When you press the [Exit] button, the reverb effect is activated, and you return to the previous screen.
No effect is applied when the slider is moved all the way to the left. In this case, the button’s indicator won’t light up when
you press the [Reverb] button.
Cancelling the Effect
4. Press the [Reverb] button so its indicator is light go out.
The reverb effect is eliminated.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Giving the Sound More Spatial Depth (3D)
The RM-700 provides a “3D” function, which creates the sense of spatial depth that you experience when playing a grand piano.
This function adds the natural resonance and spaciousness that are characteristic of an acoustic piano.
If you turn 3D on, “Vocal Effect” will turn off (p. 86).
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages. Touch
to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <3D>.
The “3D” screen appears.
4. Touch <3D>
to turn it “On.”
5. Touch <Depth>
to adjust the depth.
Setting
1–4
Explanation
Increasing the value will increase the spatial depth of the sound.
6. Touch <Mode>
to switch the mode.
Setting
Auto
Explanation
This selects settings that are adjusted for use with headphones when headphones are connected. When no headphones are
connected, settings adjusted for speakers are selected.
Speaker
Settings adjusted for listening to sounds through speakers are selected.
Settings adjusted for listening to sounds through headphones are selected.
Headphones
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting (parameter) will return to its factory setting.
7. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Changing the Brightness of the Sound (Brilliance)
You can adjust the brightness of the sound heard.
The Brilliance setting has no effect during audio recording (p. 136).
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages. Touch
to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Tone Control>.
The “Tone Control” screen appears.
4. Touch <Brilliance>
to adjust the setting.
Setting
Explanation
“0” is the standard brightness.
Values below 0 will produce a more mellow sound. Values above 0 will make the sound brighter.
-10–0–10
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting (parameter) will return to its factory setting.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Adding Liveliness to the Sound (Dynamics)
You can add liveliness to the sound to give it superb clarity and distinctness.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages. Touch
to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Tone Control>.
The “Tone Control” screen appears.
4. Touch <Dynamics>
to adjust the setting.
Setting
Off
Explanation
Dynamics sound control is turned off.
The typical dynamics will be applied.
Creates a sound with boosted bass and treble.
Standard
Sharp
Clear
Produces a sound with chords in the low registers that are clear and distinct.
Creates a sound with boosted bass.
Power
5. Touch <Dynamics Mode>
to adjust the setting.
Setting
All
Explanation
Dynamics will be applied to all sounds.
Except Audio
Dynamics will be applied to sounds other than audio.
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting (parameter) will return to its factory setting.
6. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects)
You can apply a wide range of different effects to the notes you play on the keyboard.
For more on the effect types, refer to the “Effects List” (p. 217).
1. Press the Tone button to select a Tone (p. 34).
The Tone selection screen appears.
2. Touch <Effects>.
The “Effects” screen appears.
Applying Effects to the Sound
3. Touch <ON>.
The effect selected with <Type> will be applied.
Selecting the Type of Effect
4. Touch <Type>
to select the type of effect.
Setting the Effect
The parameters that can be set change according to the type selected in Step 4.
5. Touch
for the parameter being set to select the value.
You can also move the slider with the [Value] dial.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Tone selection screen.
Cancelling the Effect
6. In the Effects screen, touch <OFF>.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Selecting the Part to Which the Effect is Added (EffectsPart)
You may find effects not being applied to certain parts when different effects are applied to the upper tone, layer tone, and lower
tone. In such instances, you can select which effect is to have priority.
1. Press the Tone button to select a Tone (p. 34).
The Tone selection screen appears.
2. Touch <Effects>.
The “Effects” screen appears.
3. Touch <Part>.
The “EffectsPart” screen appears.
4. Touch
to select the part to which the effect is added.
Explanation
Setting
Upper,
Layer1, Layer2,
Lower1, Lower2
The effect will be applied to the selected part and other parts to which the same effect has been applied.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Using the Metronome
The RM-700 features a built-in metronome.
During playback of the song and accompaniment, the metronome plays at that tempo and beat.
Using the Metronome
1. Press the [Metronome] button so its indicator is lit.
You will hear the metronome. The following screen appears.
*
You can press the [Exit] button to have the metronome continue to play while you return to the previous screen.
Stopping the Metronome
2. Press the [Metronome] button once more, and the indicator light goes out.
Changing the Metronome Settings
Adjusting the Tempo
You can adjust the tempo of the metronome. The tempo and beat of the metronome changes automatically if you use an Automatic
Accompaniment or play back a song.
1. Press the Tempo [Slow] or [Fast] buttons to adjust a tempo.
Setting
=10–500
Explanation
Pressing the Tempo [Slow] and [Fast] buttons simultaneously returns the selected song accompaniment to the basic
tempo.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Changing the Volume
The volume of the metronome can be adjusted to ten different levels.
1. In the Metronome screen, touch <Volume>.
2. Adjust the volume with the [Value] dial.
Turning the [Value] dial clockwise will increase the volume. Choose “OFF” to silence the metronome sound.
Changing the Beat of the Metronome
1. In the Metronome screen, touch <Beat>.
2. Select the beat with the [Value] dial.
Setting
Explanation
2/2, 0/4, 2/4–7/4, 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8
When “0/4” is selected, only the upbeat will sound.
Changing the Type of Sound
You can change the sound the metronome makes.
1. In the Metronome screen, touch <Sound>.
2. Select the sound with the [Value] dial.
Displayed
Explanation
Displayed
Explanation
Normal metronome sound
Electronic metronome sound
“1, 2, 3” in Japanese
Dog and cat sounds
Triangle and castanet
“1, 2, 3” in English
Wood block
Hand clap
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance
Changing How the Metronome Beat (Pattern) Sounds
You can set the Metronome to play at even smaller intervals.
1. In the Metronome screen, <Pattern>.
2. Select the pattern with the [Value] dial.
Displayed
Explanation
Displayed
Explanation
Usual sound
Dotted half-note intervals
Half-note intervals
Dotted quarter-note intervals
Dotted eighth-note intervals
Sixteenth-note intervals
Triplet rhythm added
Quarter-note intervals
Eighth-note intervals
Single back beat added
Shuffle rhythm added
Turning Off the Beat Light (Beat Indicator)
The beat light flashes in time with the metronome, Music Styles, and song tempos, but you can set it so that it stays off at all times.
1. In the Metronome screen, <Beat LED>.
2. Use the [Value] dial to choose “Off.”
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
“Automatic accompaniment” is a function that adds an accompaniment consisting of various instruments such as drums, guitar, and
bass—all you need to do is specify chords from the keyboard.
Performing a song with the Ideal Automatic Accompaniment and Sounds
(One Touch Song)
The “One Touch Song” function makes it easy to choose the ideal automatic accompaniment and sounds for the song you’ve selected.
1. Press the [One Touch Song] button.
The following screen appears.
Touch the screen
to switch performance patterns.
The title of the selected song
is displayed here
For more about <Harmony Intelligence>, refer to p. 67.
2. Touch
to choose a song.
*
You can also use the [Value] dial to choose a song.
You can touch <List> to access a list screen. Touch the name of the desired song to select it.
*
Touch
to switch pages.
3. Play the left-hand region of the keyboard.
The automatic accompaniment will start.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
4. As the song progresses, touch <Intro>–<Ending> to switch the automatic accompaniment pattern.
The currently selected performance pattern will continue repeating until you select a different pattern.
*
If you use Synchro Start (p. 63) at the <Intro>, the next performance pattern will automatically be selected when the performance
ends.
Intro
The performance pattern that plays an introduction.
The main performance pattern.
Verse
Chorus
Bridge
Ending
The climatic part of the song.
The transition between verse and chorus of the song.
The performance pattern that plays the ending of the song.
Searching for a Song by Keyword
When the list screen is displayed, you can search for songs by tempo or musical style.
You can also search for songs by the letter of their name.
1. In the list screen, touch <Search>.
The “One Touch Song Search” screen appears.
Searching by Conditions
2. Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the [Value] dial to select the search conditions.
In a condition search, the RM-700 looks for songs satisfying all of the selected search criteria.
3. Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display. Touch the song name to select the song.
Searching by Song Name
2. Touch <By Name>.
Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.
3. Decide which character you’ll use for the search.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession cycles you through the available choices in that
character group (“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.
4. Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display. Touch the song name to select the song.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment (One Touch Rhythm)
“Automatic Accompaniment” is a function that automatically adds an accompaniment in a variety of musical genres—all you need to
do is use your left hand to specify a chord.
The RM-700’s “One Touch Rhythm” function lets you make the ideal settings for automatic accompaniment simply by pressing the
One Touch Program [Rhythm] button.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Rhythm] button.
The Basic screen like the one shown below appears.
Observe the settings:
•
•
•
The keyboard is split into left- and right-hand parts, with accompaniment chords specified for the left-hand side of the keyboard.
A tone appropriate for the selected Music Style is chosen.
The tempo and beat for the selected Music Style is set.
For instructions on selecting Music Styles, refer to “Selecting Music Styles (Music Style Buttons)” (p. 59).
2. Play a chord on the Lower-part of keyboard.
The accompaniment begins, starting from the intro.
Play chords with the left hand, and the melody with the right.
Split Point (F#3)
The range specified a chord
The lower right of the screen shows the keys you pressed to specify the chord, and the name of the chord.
The chord you specified
Chord name
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
When you change chords in the left hand, the accompaniment also changes.
For instructions on starting and stopping the accompaniment, refer to “Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment” (p. 63).
3. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
After the ending plays, the accompaniment stops.
•
•
Normally, when you change a Music Style, the tempo and tone change to selections that go well with the selected Music Style. If
you do not want to change the tempo and tone, refer to “Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo (Rhythm
One Touch)” (p. 181).
You can change the range in which chords are played. Please refer to “Changing the Keyboard’s Split Point (Split Point)” (p. 178).
Leading Bass Function
When you use automatic accompaniment, the root of the chord you hold down will normally be sounded as the bass tone.
If you use the “Leading Bass” function, the lowest note of the chord you hold down will be played as the bass tone.
This means that if you hold down an inverted chord form, the bass tone that sounds will be different than usual.
1. In the Basic screen, touch <Leading Bass>.
The Leading Bass function is on if <Leading Bass> is lit; the function is off if this indicator is not lit.
Chord name
Bass tone note name
•
The task of switching on/off the Leading Bass function can be assigned to a pedal. For details, refer to “Assigning the Function of the
Pedals (Left Pedal/Center Pedal/Expression Pedal)” (p. 179).
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Playing Chords with Simple Fingering (Chord Intelligence)
The “Chord Intelligence” feature allows you to have chords be recognized even though you’ve pressed only one or two keys when
using automatic accompaniment.
To play a “C” chord, for example, you normally have to play the three keys C, E, and G. But with Chord Intelligence, you only have to
press the C key to start a “C” chord accompaniment.
About Chords
A chord is produced when several notes are played simultaneously. Chords are indicated by the pitch of the fundamental note
of the chord (the root) and the chord type, which is determined by the other notes of the chord.
For example, the C m chord is expressed in terms of the root note “C” and the chord type “m” (minor). C m is made up of the
three notes “C,” “E ” and “G.” “C m” is indicated as the chord name on the Basic screen.
C m
E
Chord Type
Root Note
C
G
Root Note
All chord roots are indicated as a letter, sometimes with
or
added, and correspond to the notes shown below.
For more information about chord fingering, refer to “Chord List” (p. 220).
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages. Touch
to switch between the pages.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
3. Touch <Rhythm Configuration>.
4. Touch <Chord Recognition Mode>
to select the either “Intelligence1” or “Intelligence2.”
Setting
Explanation
Chord Intelligence will be on.
Intelligence1, 2
Manual
Intelligence 1 and 2 differ in the keys that you press to specify the chords.
Chord Intelligence will be off. You’ll need to press all of the notes in order to specify a chord.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
How to play chords in the Chord Intelligence mode:
Intelligence 1
Intelligence 2
Ex:
C
Ex:
C
Play the chord root.
Play the root of the chord.
Major
Ex: C 7
Ex: C 7
Play the root of the chord
and the white key to the
left of the root.
Play the root and
the second key below it.
Seventh
Ex: C maj 7
Ex: C m
Play the root and
the first key below it.
Major
Seventh
Ex: C m
Play the root and
the third key above it.
Play the root of the chord
and the black key to the
left of the root.
Minor
Ex: C m7
Ex: C m7
Play the root,
the third key above it, and
the second key below it.
Play the root of the chord
and the black and white key
to the left of the root.
Minor
Seventh
Ex:
C dim
Play the root and
Diminished
the sixth key above it.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Viewing Chord Fingerings
Whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fingered, you can display the notes of the chord on the screen.
1. In the Basic screen, touch the <chord name indication>.
2. Touch the root of the chord you want to learn about.
For example, if you wanted to see the fingering for a C# chord, you would touch <C>, then touch <#>.
3. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Basic screen.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Selecting Music Styles (Music Style Buttons)
You can select a variety of Music Styles by pressing a Music Style button.
The ten buttons shown below are referred to as the “Music Style buttons”; they allow you to select a Music Styles organized into
groups by musical genre.
For more on the Music Style names, refer to the “Music Style List” (p. 218).
1. Press the One Touch Program [Rhythm] button.
2. Press one of the Music Style buttons to select the Music Style group.
The Music style button’s indicator will light, and a Music style screen like the following will appear.
The display will show the Music styles in the Music Style group you selected.
3. Touch a Music Style name to select the Music Style.
*
Touch
to switch pages.
You can touch <Search> to find Music Styles that match the selected criteria (p. 60).
4. When you’ve selected a Music Style, press the [Exit] button.
The display returns to the Basic screen.
Next, all you have to do is press a chord in the left side of the keyboard, and the selected accompaniment style will start playing.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles (Style Search)
You can search for Music Styles that match the tempo of the song, musical genre, or other criteria you set.
You can also search Music Styles using the first character of the Music Style names.
You can search for Music Styles except for those at the [User] button.
1. Press one of the Music Style buttons.
The Music Style selection screen appears.
2. Touch <Search>.
The “Style Search” screen appears.
Searching by Conditions
3. Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the [Value] dial to select the search conditions.
In a condition search, the RM-700 looks for Music Styles satisfying all of the selected search criteria.
4. Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display. Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.
Searching by Music Style Name
3. Touch <By Name>.
Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.
4. Decide which character you’ll use for the search.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession cycles you through the available choices in that
character group (“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.
5. Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display. Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Selecting an Music Style from USB Memory
The RM-700 contains a wide variety of built-in Music Styles, but you can also use Music Styles from USB memory or floppy disk.
1. Connect the USB memory containing the Music Styles to the External Memory connector.
If you want to use Music Styles from a floppy disk, connect your floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.
2. Press the [User] button.
The Music Style selection screen appears.
3. Touch <Ext Memory>.
The screen for selecting USB memory Styles appears.
4. Touch the name of a Music Style to select it.
*
Touch
to switch pages.
5. When you’ve selected a Music Style, press the [Exit] button.
6. Press the [Start/Stop] button.
You can now perform in the selected Music Style.
Music Styles selected from USB memories are stored until the power is turned off. Even after ejecting the USB memory, by pressing the
Music Style [User] button, you can perform using the most recently selected Music Style.
•
If you copy Music Styles from USB memory or floppy disk into user memory, you’ll be able to access those Music Styles simply by
pressing the [User] button (p. 73).
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Playing Only the Rhythm of the Music Style
1. Select a Music Style (p. 59).
2. Press the [Arranger] button so its indicator is turned off.
The performance is set so that only the rhythm patterns are played.
3. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
The Rhythm part of accompaniment begins, starting from the Intro.
Just as with regular Automatic Accompaniment, you can add intros and endings by pressing the [Intro/Ending] button, and make
changes to the rhythm patterns with the [Auto Fill In] button (p. 66).
•
Some Music Styles do not include rhythm patterns. When you select these Style patterns, no rhythm patterns are played.
Changing the Tempo of the Automatic Accompaniment
You can adjust the tempo of the automatic accompaniment.
1. Press the Tempo [Slow] and [Fast] buttons to change the tempo (speed) of the Automatic Accompaniment.
By pressing the Tempo [Slow] and [Fast] buttons simultaneously, the tempo is returned to the standard (preset) tempo for the
selected Music Style.
The value of the tempo currently set (10–500 beats per minute) can be checked in the screen.
•
You switch the Music Style while the Automatic Accompaniment is stopped, the tempo will automatically be set appropriately for
that Music Style.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment
Pressing the One Touch Program [Rhythm] button activates Sync Start for the accompaniment (which starts the accompaniment
simultaneously when you play on the lower section of the keyboard), and automatically sets an appropriate intro for the
accompaniment. You can also change the way the accompaniment starts and stops.
Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously When You Play the Keyboard (Sync Start)
1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously, causing the indicators of both buttons
to flash.
The Sync Start settings go into effect.
2. Play a chord on the lower-part of keyboard.
The Intro will start playing as soon as you play something on the keyboard; then, after that, the accompaniment will start playing.
Starting without an Intro
1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously, causing the indicators of both buttons
to flash.
2. Press the [Intro/Ending] button so its indicator is turned off.
3. Play a chord on the lower-part of keyboard.
The accompaniment starts without the intro.
Starting at the Press of a Button
1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously, and the indicators lights go out.
2. Play a chord on the lower-part of keyboard.
Choose the chord to be played when the accompaniment begins playing.
3. Press the [Intro/Ending] button or the [Start/Stop] button.
When you press the [Intro/Ending] button, the intro plays, and the accompaniment starts.
When you press the [Start/Stop] button, the accompaniment starts without the intro.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Chord Tones and Bass Tones
When you play the keys in the left-hand side of the keyboard while the [Start/Stop] button’s indicator is not lit, chords play.
This note is called the “Chord Tone,” and the root of the chord being played at the same time is called the “Bass Tone.”
*
You can change the sound of the chord tone and bass tone. Refer to “Selecting the Bass Tone/Chord Tone” (p. 181).
Stopping Automatic Accompaniment
Stopping with an Added Ending
1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
An ending plays and the Automatic Accompaniment stops.
Stopping at the Same Time the Button is Pressed
1. Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The Automatic Accompaniment stops as soon as you press the button.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro (Countdown)
If an intro plays before your performance, you can have a count-in sound played to the end of the intro, helping you hear when to start
playing.
1. Press the [Count] button so its indicator is lit.
The “Count” screen appears.
*
Touch
to switch pages.
2. Touch <Count Mode>
to set this to “Count In” or “Count In/down.”
3. Press the One Touch Program [Rhythm] button.
4. Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The intro plays, and a countdown plays to the end of the intro.
If you’ve specified Count In/down, a count will also be heard before the intro.
5. To stop the countdown, press the [Count] button so its indicator is turned off.
By pressing the [Exit] button instead of the [Count] button, you can exit the “Count” screen without cancelling the count.
•
•
•
When set to “Count In/down,” a count sound is added before playback of the song begins.
For more about settings on the “Count” screen, refer to “Changing the Settings for the Count” (p. 171).
You can touch <Marker> to move to the Marker screen (p. 118).
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Adding Variety to the Accompaniment
Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and Accompaniment (Variation)
You can change the arrangement of the accompaniment. For each Music Style, there are four types of arrangement for the
accompaniment.
1. Press the [Variation] buttons to change the arrangement of the accompaniment.
The indicator of the button you pressed will light.
The Variation [1] button produces the simplest arrangement, and the Variation [4] button produces the most florid.
For an intro or ending, Variation [1] button is the shortest and simplest.
Changing the Accompaniment Pattern (Auto Fill In/Break)
You can add variety to the automatic accompaniment by inserting a fill-in to change the pattern, or by inserting a break (i.e., stopping
the accompaniment for one measure).
Button
Function
[Auto Fill In]
[Break]
A fill-in will automatically be added when you press a [Variation] button to change the accompaniment or rhythm arrangement.
Stop the Rhythm at the end of that measure (Break).
What’s a “Fill In”?
A Fill In is a short phrase that is inserted at a break in the melody or at a point where the character of the song changes
(between Chorus’s or Verses).
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Adding Harmony to the Right-Hand Part (Harmony Intelligence)
You can add harmony to the notes you play on the keyboard.
While an Automatic Accompaniment is playing, the matching harmony is automatically added to the notes you are playing with the
right hand. This function is called “Harmony Intelligence.”
1. In the Basic screen, touch <Harmony Intelligence>.
The “Harmony Intelligence” screen appears.
2. Touch the screen to select the desired type of harmony.
*
Touch
to switch the screens.
Then when you play a melody on the keyboard, a harmony style is automatically added.
With some harmonies, Tones may change automatically. The tones will not change automatically for harmonies whose
name has an “*” symbol. Also, when you play several keys at the same time, in some cases harmony may be added to one
note.
3. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Basic screen.
4. To cancel the Harmony Intelligence, touch <Harmony Intelligence> and the icon returns to the original color.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a Performance (Lower Tone)
Normally, when using Automatic Accompaniment in a performance, sounds are not produced by playing the left-hand part of the
keyboard. When you touch the <Lower 1> or <Lower 2> icon, you can have Tones from the left side of the keyboard play
simultaneously with the Automatic Accompaniment.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Rhythm] button.
The Basic screen appears.
2. Touch <Lower 1>.
Now when you play a chord in the left-hand keyboard area, the notes you play will sound, and the accompaniment chord changes.
In the same manner, you can play the lower tone by touching <Lower 2>.
By touching both <Lower 1> and <Lower 2>, you can get a Layer performance for the left-hand.
Stopping the Sound in the Left-hand
3. Touch <Lower 1>.
The <Lower 1> icon returns to the original color.
To have <Lower 2> play as well, also touch <Lower 2>.
The lower Tones stop playing.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added (Piano Style Arranger)
Usually with Automatic Accompaniment, you play chords on the left-hand side of the keyboard and the melody on the right-hand
side. Chords can also be recognized over the entire keyboard, allowing you to perform using Automatic Accompaniment without
splitting the keyboard. This function is called “Piano Style Arranger.”
This makes it possible to add an accompaniment automatically as you play a song by playing chords in the ordinary way, without
giving any thought to the location of a keyboard split.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Rhythm] button.
The Basic screen appears.
2. Touch <Split> to turn the Split function off.
3. Select a Music Style (p. 59).
4. Play the keyboard.
The accompaniment starts when you play a chord anywhere on the keyboard.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part (Balance)
You can adjust the volume balance between the accompaniment and the keyboard, and the volume balance for each of the parts in a
Music Style.
Changing the Volume Balance Between the Accompaniment and the Keyboard (Balance Knob)
You can change the volume balance between a song and accompaniment and the notes you play on the keyboard.
1. Adjust the volume balance with the [Balance] knob.
When this knob is turned completely to the Accompaniment side, no sounds from the keyboard are audible, even when the
keys are pressed. You can usually leave the knob at the center position.
Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part (Part Balance)
You can adjust the volume of each performance part in a Music Style, and the balance between parts when playing multiple Tones on
the keyboard.
1. In the Basic screen, touch <Part Balance>.
The “Part Balance” screen appears.
*
If <Accomp> is shown in the lower left of the screen, touch <Accomp>.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
2. Touch
*
Touch
to switch the screens.
The volume balance between the performance parts in the Music Style is indicated.
Display
Performance part
Rhythm
Bass
Music Style Rhythm Part
Music Style Bass Part
Accompaniment 1–6
Chord Tone (p. 64)
Accomp1–6
Chord Tone
Bass Tone
Audio
Bass Tone (p. 64)
Audio (music CD, audio file)
When you touch <Keyboard>, a screen like the following appears.
This shows the volume balance between the keyboard’s Tones when either layer performance (p. 38) or split performance (p. 39) are
used, or the volume balance when using the keyboard to play percussion instruments or sound effects (p. 36).
Display
Drum/SFX
Upper
Tone part
Percussion instruments or sound effects played with the keys
Upper Tone
Layer Tone 1
Layer Tone 2
Lower Tone 1
Lower Tone 2
Layer 1
Layer 2
Lower 1
Lower 2
When you touch <Accomp>, you return to the screen for setting the Music Style volume balance.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Copying a Music Style
Music Styles saved in external memory can be copied to user memory.
Conversely, Music Styles in user memory can be copied to external memory.
Copying a Music Style from USB Memory to User Memory
1. Connect the USB memory containing the Music Style to the External Memory connector.
If you want to use Music Styles from a floppy disk, connect your floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.
2. Press the [User] button.
The Music Style selection screen appears.
3. Touch <File>.
The “Style File Menu” screen appears.
4. Touch <Copy>.
The “Copy Style” screen appears.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
5. Touch the large arrow icon in the center of the screen to make it point downward.
6. Touch <Media> to select the media containing the Music Style that you want to copy.
Choose “Ext Memory” if you want to copy a Music Style from USB memory.
Choose “Disk” if you want to copy a Music Style from floppy disk.
7. Touch <File>
to select the Music Style that you want to copy.
If you choose <All>, all accompaniment styles on the USB memory or floppy disk will be copied in a single operation.
8. Touch <User>
to select the copy-destination number.
If a Music Style name is shown for a number, that number already contains a Music Style.
9. Touch <Execute>.
The Music style will be copied.
•
Never disconnect the USB memory or turn off the power while the “Executing...” indication is shown.
Copying Music Styles from User Memory to USB Memory
You can copy Music Styles from user memory to USB memory.
In this case, touch the arrow icon located in the center of the “Copy Style” screen in step 5 of the above procedure, so the arrow points
upwards.
In this state, you’ll be copying Music Styles from user memory to USB memory.
The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying Music Styles from USB memory to user memory.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Accompaniment
Deleting Saved Music Style
You can delete Music Styles stored in User memory or USB memory.
If you want to delete an accompaniment style from USB memory, connect the USB memory to the External Memory
connector before you continue.
1. Press the [User] button.
The Music Style selection screen appears.
2. Touch <File>.
The “Style File Menu” screen appears.
3. Touch <Delete>.
The “Delete Style” screen appears.
4. Touch <Media>
to select the media containing the Music Style that you want to delete.
Choose “User” if you want to delete the Music Style saved in user memory, or choose “Ext Memory” if you want to delete the Music
Style saved in USB memory.
5. Touch <File>
to select the number of the Music Style that you want to delete.
6. Touch <Execute>.
The Music Style will be deleted.
•
Never disconnect the USB memory or turn off the power while the “Executing...” indication is shown.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
The RM-700 lets you play back internal songs, songs that you yourself recorded, songs that are saved on USB memory (sold separately),
songs from a music CD, or songs in audio/MP3 format.
You can also play back separately available VIMA TUNES songs (CD-ROMs produced for VIMA).
Playing a Song
Selecting the Song
•
•
If you want to playing a song from USB memory, connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.
If you want to playing a song from a CD-ROM, insert the CD-ROM into the CD drive.
1. Press the [Song] button so its indicator is lit.
The Song selection screen appears.
Genre
2. Touch the genre icon to select the desired song genre.
If you press the [Others] button when a VIMA TUNES song is selected, <VIMA TUNES> will appear in the sound selection
screen. If you touch this <VIMA TUNES> indication, the recommended tones will be displayed.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
3. Touch the name of the song to be played back.
You can also select a song by using the [
(Prev)] [
(Next)] buttons or the [Value] dial.
*
Touch
to switch pages.
“New Song” (p. 77) will be selected if you press the [
genres.
(Prev)] button after you've selected the first song in any of the
Song in SMF format
Playing Hints (p. 78) are shown
Song contains lyrics
Notation available in the included “Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces”
Music CD or song in audio format
DigiScore screen contains chord indications
DigiScore screen contains fingering indications
Song in MP3 format
When selecting songs in folders
1. Touch the folder name.
2. Touch the folder name once again.
After a moment, a list of songs in the folder is displayed.
*
*
You can also open a folder by touching the folder and then pressing the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Alternatively, you can open a folder by using the [
(Prev)] [
(Next)] buttons, the remote’s [
(Play/Stop)] button.
] [
]
buttons, or the [Value] dial to select a folder, and then pressing the [
To exit the folder
1. Touch “Up” shown at the beginning of the list.
2. Touch “Up” once again.
•
•
When you touch <All Song>, all of the songs in the genre you have selected are played in order, starting from the selected song.
When the last song is finished, playback resumes from the first song in the genre.
When you touch <Random>, songs selected from all of the internal songs are played in random order. When “Favorites” is selected
as the genre, songs registered in “Favorites” are played back in random order.
When “Ext Memory” or “CD” is selected as the genre, the songs in the folder appearing on the screen are played back in random
order.
Playing back
3. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The button indicator lights up, and playback of the song begins.
Button
[
Function
Moves to the beginning of the currently selected song.
If you’re at the beginning of the song, you’ll move to the
beginning of the previous song.
Pressing this while the [Menu] button’s indicator is lit will
move to the previous measure each time you press the
button.
(Prev)]
(Next)]
Pressing this while the song is playing will rewind the song.
Moves to the beginning of the next song.
Pressing this while the song is playing will fast-forward the
song.
Pressing this while the [Menu] button’s indicator is lit will
move to the next measure each time you press the button.
[
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
Stopping the Song
4. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The button indicator light goes out, and the song stops.
When the song is finished, playback stops automatically.
Press the [
(Prev)] button to return to the beginning of the song.
Track Buttons (Accomp, Left, Right)
Each performance part of the song being played back is assigned to a track button. Use these buttons to select the
performance parts that are muted or played. For more detailed information, refer to p. 116.
If the following screen appears
If you attempt to select a different song when a song has already been recorded, a screen like the following will appear.
If it is ok to delete the song you recorded, touch <OK>. If you don’t want to delete the song, touch <Cancel> to cancel the song
selection, and save the song you recorded (p. 134).
What is “New Song”?
“New Song” refers to a state in which no particular song is selected.
For example, when you’re going to create a new song using the 16-track sequencer(p. 156), this is the state you need to start
from.
In order to enter the “New Song” state, you can use one of the following methods.
•
•
In the song selection screen, press the [
(Prev)] button after you’ve selected the first song in any of the genres.
(Rec)] button.
While holding down the [Song] button, press the [
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
Viewing the Playing Hint
When you select a song that indicates
and press the [Slide Show] button so the button’s indicator is lit, the screen will show
information about that song and a profile of the composer. In addition, advice on how to play the song will be shown at the bottom of
the screen.
This function is called “Playing Hint.”
When you press the [Play/Stop] button to play the song, this advice will be shown at various points during the song.
Viewing Information About the Song
You can view information about the song, such as the file name and the data format.
1. In the Song selection screen, touch <File>.
The “Song File Menu” screen appears.
2. Touch <Information>.
The song information will be displayed.
3. Press the [Exit] button a number of times to return to the previous screen.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
Saving a Song in “Favorites”
What are the “Favorites”?
“Favorites” refers to an area of memory in which you can store performances you’ve recorded on the RM-700 or have copied
from a connected USB memory or CD-ROM.
Songs you’ve copied to “Favorites” will be retained even after you turn off the power, so if you collect your favorite songs in
“Favorites,” you’ll be able to easily select them when you want.
Saving an Internal Song to “Favorites”
1. From the internal songs, select the song that you want to save to “Favorites” (p. 75).
2. Touch <File>.
The “Song File Menu” screen appears.
3. Touch <Save/Rename>.
The “Save Song” screen appears.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
Determining the Name of the Song to be Saved
*
If you don’t need to rename the song, proceed to step 8.
4. Touch <Rename>.
The “Rename” screen appears.
5. Touch
to move the cursor.
6. Enter the desired characters.
Icon
Explanation
Enters a character at the cursor location.
For example, each time you touch the <ABC> icon, the character to be entered will cycle in the order of A → B → C → A...
< ABC >–< YZ >
Cycles you through the available selections for the character type, in this order: “Uppercase letters,” “Lowercase letters,”
“Numerals,” “Symbols.”
< A–a–0–! >
< Ins >
< Del >
Insert a space at the cursor position.
Delete the character at the cursor position.
7. When you’ve specified the desired name, press the [Exit] button.
Determining the Save Destination
8. Touch <Media>
9. Touch <File>
to select the “Favorites.”
to select the save-destination song number.
If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number.
If you select a number with a previously saved song and then proceed to save a new song, the previously saved song will be erased.
If you do not want to lose a saved song, select a number with no song name indicated in the save-destination column.
Save
10. Touch <Execute>.
The song will be saved.
•
Never turn off the power until saving has been completed.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
Copying a Song from USB Memory to “Favorites”
*
Before you continue, connect the USB memory containing the song to the External Memory connector.
1. In the Song selection screen, touch <File>.
The “Song File Menu” screen appears.
2. Touch <Copy>.
The “Copy Song” screen appears.
3. Touch the <File>
to select the song you want to copy.
When “All” is selected, all of the songs on the USB memory are copied to “Favorites.”
4. Touch the large arrow icon in the center of the screen to make it point downward.
5. Touch Favorites <File>
to select the copy destination for the song.
If a song name is displayed with a number, a song is already saved to that number.
If you select a number with previously saved song data and proceed to copy to that location, the previously saved song will be erased.
If you don’t want to erase a previously saved song, choose a number with no song name appears in the destination column.
6. Touch <Execute>.
The song(s) will be copied.
•
Never disconnect the USB memory or turn off the power while the “Executing...” indication is shown.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
Changing the Tempo (Playback Speed) of a Song
Here’s how to change the tempo of a song.
If a song is too fast for you to play or sing along comfortably, you can slow it down to a more comfortable tempo.
Changing the tempo (playback speed) will not affect the pitch. You can also change the tempo even while the song is playing.
In the case of a music CD or audio/MP3 format song, the playback speed will change.
1. Press the Tempo [Slow] [Fast] buttons to adjust the tempo (playback speed).
Pressing the Tempo [Slow] button will make the tempo slower, and pressing the Tempo [Fast] button will make the tempo faster.
•
For an SMF format song, the tempo can be adjusted in a range of =10–500.
•
For a music CD song or an audio/MP3 format song, you can adjust the playback speed in a range of 75%–125% relative to an
original playback speed of 100%.
2. To return to the normal tempo (playback speed) of the song, press the Tempo [Slow] and [Fast] buttons
simultaneously.
The “normal tempo (playback speed)” is the appropriate tempo that is pre-specified for each song.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
Using the Remote Control
You can use the included remote control to easily start and stop performances and switch songs.
How to Use the Remote Control
When using the remote control, aim the remote control at the infrared receiver, keeping in mind the range of operation (below).
Infrared receiver
Range of operation
Distance:
4 m (approximately 13 feet)
Remote Control
Angle:
40 degrees to the left and right
of the receiver.
Precautions Concerning Use of the Remote Control
•
•
The remote control is able to transmit only one operation at a time.
Even though you’re using it within the normal recommended range, you may not obtain satisfactory results with the remote control
if there are objects blocking its path, or if you're using it at an odd angle.
•
•
It's possible that it won’t work correctly if you’re using it in the vicinity of equipment that emits infrared light, or if you’re using other
remote controls that make use of infrared light.
The life of the battery depends on the amount and conditions of use. If the operational range of the remote control decreases,
change the batteries.
•
•
If you will not be using the remote control for a long period of time, remove the batteries.
The remote’s response may suffer if the remote’s sensor is situated under spotlights or exposed to other such strong lighting
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
Button Functions
Button
Explanation
Pressing this button cycles you through the available screens,
like this: slide show → piano roll (classic) → piano roll
(modern) → DigiScore → DigiScore + keyboard → the screen
you specified in Video Out Mode (p. 195) → slide show →...
DISPLAY
1
Infrared Emitter
Each time you press this button, the sounds of the left-hand
track and right-hand track will change.
TONE
2
3
The left-hand track and right-hand track will be the piano
sound.
CANCEL
This switches the genres of the internal songs.
Selects songs in the “Favorites.”
INTERNAL
FAVORITES
4
If USB memory, CD drive, or floppy disk drive is connected,
pressing this button will select the connected media.
EXTERNAL
Pressing the [
] button at the beginning of the song
selects the previous song.
Pressing the [
] button at a point other than the
beginning of the song returns you to the beginning of the
song.
5
Playback alternately starts and stops each time you press the
[
] button.
You can also assign functions to the button p. 184.
When you press the [
] button, the next song is selected.
This mutes all of the sounds.
You can adjust the volume.
MUTE
6
7
VOL -, +
You can use the function assigned to these buttons.
You can also change the function assigned to the button (p.
185).
FUNC1, FUNC2
TEMPO -, +
8
9
This adjusts the tempo.
You can also assign functions to the button (p. 185).
This transpose the sounds from the keyboard and songs
being played back.
You can also assign functions to the button (p. 185).
TRANSPOSE -, +
10
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
Minimizing the Melody of a Music CD or Audio/MP3 Format Song
(Center Cancel)
This function reduces the volume of the melodic portion when you play back an audio/ MP3 format song or a song from a music CD.
This is convenient when you want to practice playing the melody or singing the vocal yourself.
The Center Cancel function can also be applied to the sound from a portable audio player connected to the Roland Audio
Port (p. 195).
•
•
If you want to play back a song from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector.
If you want to play back a song from a CD-ROM or music CD, insert the CD into the CD drive.
1. Select a song (p. 75).
2. Press the [Center Cancel] button so its indicator is lit.
The Center Cancel function is turned on.
3. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button so its indicator is lit.
The song will begin playing. The sound of the melody will be temporarily reduced.
4. To cancel the Center Cancel function, press the [Center Cancel] button so its indicator is turned off.
The Center Cancel function is turned off.
•
Depending on the song, the melody may not disappear entirely.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
Adding Effects to Microphone Vocals (Vocal Effect)
With a microphone connected, you can add effects to the microphone vocals.
Adding effects to the vocals is referred to as “Vocal Effect.”
If you turn Vocal Effect on, “3D” (p. 44) will turn off.
Adding Harmony to Match the Song
When you sing along with a song that has the “
” indication by its title, such as the internal songs or VIMA TUNES (CD-ROMs
produced for VIMA), you can use the “Vocal Harmony” function, which uses the chord data included in the song to automatically
generate harmony that is suitable for the song.
Unless you’re playing back a song for which
appears next to its name, this function analyzes your keyboard
performance to detect the chords you play, and automatically generates the most suitable harmony for those chords.
You can add a backing chorus in addition to the harmony effect. Refer to “Adding a Backing Chorus to the Harmony
(Backing Choir)” (p. 175).
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages. Touch
to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Vocal Effect (Mic)>.
The “Vocal Effect” screen appears.
4. Touch <Effect>
to turn it “On.”
The task of switching on/off the Effect can be assigned to a pedal (p. 179).
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
5. Touch <Effect Type>
to choose one of the following settings.
Setting
Duet
Explanation
One voice of harmony will be added to your vocal.
Two voices of harmony will be added to your vocal.
Three voices of harmony will be added to your vocal.
Trio
Quartet
The task of switching the harmony type can be assigned to a pedal (p. 179).
6. Touch <Harmony Level>
to specify the volume of the harmony.
Setting
0–127
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting (parameter) will return to its factory setting.
7. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
8. Select a song that has the indication.
9. Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button to play the song.
10. Sing into the microphone.
Harmony appropriate for the song will be added to your voice.
Modifying Your Voice (Transformer)
Here’s how you can transform a female voice into a male voice, or give your voice a robot-like character.
1. Perform steps 1–4 of “Adding Harmony to Match the Song.”
5. Touch <Effect Type>
to choose one of the following settings.
Setting
Kids
Explanation
Your voice will be given a child-like character.
Bear
Your voice will be given a character suggestive of a large animal.
Your voice will be given a robot-like character.
Robot
Duck
Your voice will be given a duck-like character.
Alien
Your voice will be given a character suggestive of a space alien.
Your voice will be given a computer-like character.
Computer
Female
Male
A male voice will be given the character of a female voice.
A female voice will be given the character of a male voice.
The pitch of your voice will be corrected to match the melody of the song.
Pitch Correct
*
If you select this setting, you won’t hear the vocal from the microphone unless the song is playing.
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting (parameter) will return to its factory setting.
6. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
7. Sing into the microphone.
The effect will be applied to the sound from the microphone.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
Adding Echo to Vocals (Echo)
You can add echo to vocals arriving via the microphone. This will make singing more enjoyable.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages. Touch
to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Vocal Effect (Mic)>.
The “Vocal Effect” screen appears.
4. Touch
to change pages.
5. Touch <Effect Sw>
to turn it “On.”
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Playback
6. Touch <Echo Type>
to choose one of the following settings.
Setting
Explanation
1
2
A beautiful reverberation will be added.
A karaoke-type echo will be added.
7. Touch <Echo Level>
to adjust the depth of the echo.
Setting
1–10
Explanation
Higher values produce a greater amount of echo.
8. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
9. Sing into the microphone.
The specified echo will be applied to the sound from the microphone.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Music and Video
Playing Photos Automatically (Slide Show)
“Slide Show” is a function that switches between images at a specified interval of time. By displaying images while a song plays, you
can enjoy music and images simultaneously.
The slide show can also be viewed on an external display or television connected to the RM-700.
While a Slide Show is being displayed, pressing the [Exit] button will return the RM-700’s own display to its previous screen
while leaving the Slide Show visible on an external display.
You can specify how the transition will occur between images (photos) in the slide show. For details, refer to “Selecting the
Type of Slide Show (Type)” (p. 173).
Enjoying a Slide Show Along with Internal Songs or VIMA TUNES
You can watch a slide show while listening to one of the RM-700’s internal songs or VIMA TUNES (CD-ROMs produced for VIMA).
The RM-700’s internal songs provide slide show images that are appropriate for each song.
This means that when you play back an internal song, a slide show suitable for that song can be automatically shown on the display.
Songs on VIMA TUNES (CD-ROMs produced for VIMA) also provide slide show images suitable for each song, making it easy for you to
enjoy a slide show without having to provide your own images.
1. Select an internal song or a VIMA TUNES song (p. 75).
2. Press the [Slide Show] button so its indicator is lit.
3. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to play back the song.
A slide show suitable for the character of the song will be shown on the display.
4. To stop slide show, press the [Slide Show] button to turn off its indicator.
5. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to stop the song.
•
If you play back a song that does not have slide show images (such as a song you recorded), the default slide show will appear.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Music and Video
Selecting the Type of Image Used for the Slide Show (Picture Category)
The slide show images built into the RM-700 are organized into several “categories” according to the depicted object or the
atmosphere of the image.
The internal songs and VIMA TUNES (CD-ROMs produced for VIMA) songs specify slide show images that are suitable for the mood of
that song, but you can also switch categories to enjoy slide shows that are different than usual.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Slide Show>.
The “Slide Show” screen appears.
Press the [Slide Show] button so its indicator is lit, and then press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit; the “Slide Show”
screen will appear.
3. Touch <Picture Category>
to switch the category.
Category
Auto
Explanation
The slide show images specified for each song will be used.
1: Kids, 2: Animal, 3: Goods, 4: Love, 5: Dream, 6: Abstract, 7: Urban, 8: Sea, 9: Summer, 10: Sunset, 11: Star, 12: Sky, 13: Nature,
26: Holiday, 27: Winter, 28: Europe
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting (parameter) will return to its factory setting.
4. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
•
For information on the other parameters that can be set in the “Slide Show” screen, refer to “Slide Show Settings” (p. 173).
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Music and Video
Watching a Slide Show with Digital Camera Photos
Photos of your vacation or family pet can be shown in the display as a slide show. They can also be shown on the larger screen of a
television or display connected to the RM-700.
Simply use a USB cable included with your digital camera to connect your digital camera to the RM-700.
You can perform while displaying the slide show, or play back a song to add background music.
Image data that can be displayed
Recommended: 640 x 480 pixels or smaller and 200 kilobytes or less
(Images of 1280 x 960 pixels or smaller and 400 kilobytes or less are supported)
*
If you are taking photographs for the purpose of displaying them on the RM-700, we recommend that you set your
camera to an image size of 640 x 480 pixels beforehand.
Size
*
Taking a photograph at a resolution that is larger than recommended will not improve the quality of the image
unnecessarily greater, lengthening the time required to switch to the specified image.
Format
JPEG format (.JPG)
You can only connect a digital camera that supports USB mass storage class or PTP format. For details, refer to the owner’s
manual of your digital camera.
1. Make sure that your digital camera contains the photos you want to view as a slide show.
2. Select the song that you want to play (p. 75).
3. Use a USB cable to connect your digital camera to the RM-700’s External Memory connector.
USB cable included
with your digital camera
4. Press the [Slide Show] button so its indicator is lit.
5. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button so its indicator is lit.
The photos in your digital camera will be displayed as a slide show.
When all of the photos have been displayed, the slide show will begin again from the first photo.
•
You can’t operate the digital camera from the RM-700.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Music and Video
Watching a Slide Show with Photos Saved on USB Memory
Photos (images) saved on USB memory can be displayed as a slide show.
1. On your computer, prepare the images that you want to display.
Image data that can be displayed
800 x 480 pixels (recommended)
(Images of 1280 x 960 pixels or smaller and 400 kilobytes or less are supported)
Size
*
If you use images that are larger than the recommended size, it may take longer to switch images.
Format
JPEG format (.JPG)
2. Connect the USB memory to your computer, and create a folder named “_PICTURE” on the USB memory.
3. Place the images you want to display in the “_PICTURE” folder.
4. Connect the USB memory containing the images you want to display to the RM-700’s External Memory
connector.
5. Select the song that you want to play, and play back the song.
6. Press the [Slide Show] button so it’s lit.
The images in the USB memory will be displayed as a slide show on the display.
•
Some images may not be displayed in the slide show if 500 or more images are contained in a single folder.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Music and Video
Having the Image Change According to Your Performance (Anime)
“Anime” is a special effect that displays graphics or text on the screen in synchronization with your keyboard performance or the
sounds of the song that is playing, and moves the graphics or text while they gradually disappear.
The Anime effect can also be used together with the Slide Show.
When you’re performing along with a song, you can create even greater visual impact by adding animation to the successively
changing images.
1. Press the [Anime] button so its indicator is lit.
Anime effect will turn on.
2. Play the keyboard or play back a song (p. 75).
Each time you play a key, graphics or text will appear, and will move around the screen as they gradually disappear.
•
•
Even if you switch the slide show type (p. 173) while the Anime effect is operating, the change will not be reflected.
You can assign the pedal to control the Anime effect. For details, refer to “Assigning the Function of the Pedals (Left Pedal/Center
Pedal/Expression Pedal)” (p. 179).
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Music and Video
Changing the Anime type
You can change the graphics or text and the color and type of the characters that are shown in the display by the Anime effect.
1. Press the [Anime] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Anime>.
The “Anime” screen appears.
Press the [Anime] button so its indicator is lit, and then press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit; the “Anime” screen will
appear.
Type
Color
3. Touch the screen to choose the Type and Color.
*
You can switch the variation type by touching <Variation> so the button is lit. For each type, “variation types” with differing types of
change are provided.
*
Each time you touch <Length>, the button color will change in the order of Orange → Red → Gray (normal) → Orange...
When the button is Orange or red, the Anime effect will operate as follows.
Orange
Red
The graphics or text in the screen will move faster, and the time until they fade and disappear will also be shorter.
The graphics or text in the screen will retain their original clarity until they disappear abruptly.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen.
5. Play the keyboard or play back a song.
The “Anime” effect will operate with the type and color you specified.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Music and Video
Watching the Notes while a Song Plays (Piano Roll)
The RM-700 provides an on-screen simulation of a player piano.
When you play back a song while viewing the classic-type piano roll screen, the on-screen keyboard will move automatically and the
notes will be shown in the screen. This provides a visual indication of the pitch and duration of each note. For even more enjoyment,
the RM-700 also provides Roland’s own modern-type piano roll screen which lets you change the background image (wallpaper) and
specify how the notes will appear.
The piano roll screen can be shown not just in the RM-700’s built-in display but also on a large external display or television so that
everyone can enjoy it.
You can’t display the piano roll screen for a song from a music CD and an audio/MP3 format.
1. Press the [Piano Roll] button so its indicator is lit.
The Piano Roll screen appears.
2. Press the [Piano Roll] button to switch the type of piano roll screen.
Pressing the [Piano Roll] button repeatedly cycles you through the available choices for the piano roll screen, in this order: piano roll
screen (classic type) → piano roll screen (modern type) → piano roll screen off → piano roll screen (classic type),... etc.
Classic type
Modern type
Off
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Music and Video
3. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to play back the song.
The song will play, and the notes will be shown in the screen.
Even while the song is playing, you can press the [Piano Roll] button to switch the type of piano roll screen.
4. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to stop the song.
•
•
If Drums or SFX are selected as the sound, the on-screen keys will not move when you play the keyboard.
You can change the color of the piano for the classic type piano roll screen, and switch the background image or display method for
the modern type piano roll screen.
→ “Piano Roll Screen Settings” (p. 174)
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Playing in a Wonderland of Sound
“Wonderland” allows children to experience a variety of sounds and internal songs with easy operation and enjoyable animation.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Play>.
3. Touch <Wonderland>.
The Wonderland Menu screen appears.
4. Touch the screen to select an item.
Item
How it is used
Piano
Learn how the piano is constructed.
In this game, you play the notes shown on the cards.
Listen to the internal songs.
Flash Card
Songs
Select a picture of an instrument to hear the sound of that instrument.
Play the keyboard to play the selected instrument.
Tones
Select a picture of a percussion instrument to hear the sound of that instrument.
Play the keyboard to play the selected percussion instrument.
Drums
Alphabet
SFX
Use the keyboard to become familiar with the alphabet.
Listen to a wide variety of sound effects.
Game
In this game, you try to the tone name, chords, and rhythms that you hear.
5. Try playing as you view the screen.
6. To exit Wonderland, press the [Exit] button a number of times.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Playing Songs Using the Lesson Functions (Visual Lesson)
You can enjoy your practices with the RM-700’s Lesson function (Visual Lesson).
Play along with the accompaniment, and your score appears in the display showing how well you played. In addition, in the Check
screen you can see the results shown as notation, allowing you to confirm just what you played.
You can select the course and practice songs to match your current abilities. You can also supplement your stock of practice songs
with additional music files.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Play>.
3. Touch <Visual Lesson>.
The “Visual Lesson” screen appears.
Selecting the Course
4. Touch the screen to select the course that you want to practice.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Selecting the Song
5. Touch the screen to select the song that you want to practice.
•
•
•
You can audition the sound by pressing the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
You can adjust the tempo by pressing the Tempo [Slow] [Fast] buttons.
You can also play the metronome sound by pressing the [Metronome] button.
6. When you’ve selected a song, touch
in the lower right of the screen.
*
If you selected <Beginner> or <Challenge>, proceed to step 8.
If you selected <Repertoire>, a screen like the following appears.
7. Touch the item to be specified, and set the value with the [Value] dial.
Item
Value
Explanation
Part
Both Hands, Right Hand, Left Hand
Much Slower, Slower, A Little Slower, Original Tempo
(song top) –
This selects the part to be practiced.
This sets the tempo for your practice.
This sets the starting measure.
This sets the ending measure.
Tempo
Start Measure
End Measure
– (song end)
8. After you’ve specified the various items, touch
in the center of the screen.
The following screen appears.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
9. After reading the message in the screen, touch <OK>.
The notation will appear and the accompaniment will start.
<Beginner>
<Challenge> / <Repertoire>
10. Play along with the accompaniment.
*
If you stop playing before the end of the song, the song playback stops, and the screen showing the graded result appears.
When you finish playing, your performance will be scored.
11. Touch
at the bottom of the screen to see how well you did.
Grayed Out
The proper note was not played.
1
2
3
4
Pitch (Red)
The pitch was incorrect.
Rhythm (Blue)
The timing of the accent was off.
1
2
3
? (Green)
4
A note not in the notation was played.
•
•
If you touch either “Ref.(reference)” or “You” and then press the [
will be played back.
(Play/Stop)] button, the performance of the selected part
If you touch either “Ref.” or “You” and then turn the [Value] dial, you’ll be able to hear the notes of the selected part while checking
your results.
•
•
•
•
You can touch a note to hear that note play.
You can drag over the notation to play back the part for the region over which you dragged.
You can play the keyboard to verify the key for a note. (Beginner course only)
Press the [
pressed.
(Prev)] button, the notation is switched, and going back one measure in the notation each time the button is
•
Press the [
pressed.
(Next)] button, the notation is switched, and advancing one measure in the notation each time the button is
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
12. Touch
in the upper right of the screen.
The following screen appears.
<Beginner> / <Challenge>
<Repertoire>
13. Touch the item that you want to choose next.
•
•
•
•
If you want to practice the same song again, touch <Try Again>.
If you want to practice another song, touch <Song Select>.
If you want to change the settings for the lesson content, touch <Setting>. (Repertoire course only)
If you are finished with Visual Lesson, touch <Exit>.
•
You can touch <Export> to save your performance result as an image file. For details, refer to “Saving Notations as Image Data” (p.
111).
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Practicing with Internal Songs and Songs on USB Memory
Not only can you practice the songs prepared for use in Visual Lesson, you can also practice other RM-700 internal songs and songs
saved on USB memory.
*
When practicing songs saved on USB memory, be sure to have the USB memory connected to the RM-700’s External Memory
connector first.
If you want to use a song on USB memory with Visual Lesson, use parts 3 and 4 to record the parts you’ll be practicing, and
use part 2 and parts 5–16 to record the accompaniment.
You can’t use Visual Lesson with a music CD or an audio/MP3 format song.
1. In the practice song selection screen, touch <Preset/File>.
A screen will appear, allowing you to select internal songs or USB memory songs.
Page icon
Scroll bar
Page icon
*
If you touch <Lesson Song>, you’ll return to the screen where you can select a practice song for Visual Lesson.
2. Touch
to select a genre.
3. Touch a song name to select a song.
•
•
You can scroll the list by touching the scroll bar and sliding it up or down.
You can switch pages by touching
.
•
Depending on the data size of the song, it may not play all the way to the end when using Visual Lesson. In such cases, you’ll need
to reduce the data size of the song by using the functions described in “Editing Songs” (p. 163). One solution would be to extract
the portion that you want to practice.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Splitting the Keyboard Into Two Sections for Four-Hand Performances
(Twin Piano)
You can divide the keyboard into two separate sections, allowing two people to perform in the same registers.
By dividing the keyboard into two sections, you can use the instrument as though they were two pianos.
Even when playing in tandem, its easy to see whether or not the two players’ performances are matching.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Play>.
3. Touch <Twin Piano>.
The “Twin Piano” screen appears.
The following occurs with Twin Piano set to ON.
•
•
•
The keyboard is divided into two sections which can be played with “Middle C” placed at the center of each section.
The same tone (Superior Grd) is sounded by both sections.
The right pedal now functions as the damper pedal for the right keyboard section, and the left pedal functions as the damper pedal
for the left keyboard section.
•
•
If you were performing using the split or layer feature before you turned on Twin Piano, the split or layer feature will be turned off.
3D and Damper Resonance will be off.
After you’ve turned Twin Piano on, you can press the [Tone] button to switch sounds.
4. To exit Twin Piano, press the [Exit] button.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Changing the Way in Which the Sound is Heard (Twin Piano Mode)
You can choose one of two ways in which the sound will be produced.
1. In the “Twin Piano” screen, touch <Pair> or <Individual> to select the Twin Piano mode.
Setting
Pair
Explanation
Notes played in the keyboard’s right zone will be heard more loudly from the right speaker than from the left speaker.
Conversely, notes played in the keyboard’s left zone will be heard more loudly from the left speaker than from the right
speaker.
Notes played in the keyboard’s right zone will be heard only from the right speaker. Notes played in the keyboard’s left zone
will be heard only from the left speaker.
Individual
*
When you play the left keyboard area, sound will not be heard from the headphones connected to the right Phones
jack. Similarly, when you play the right keyboard area, sound will not be heard from the left headphones.
*
Reverb will be off.
You will hear a clicking sound when you switch the Twin Piano Mode, but this does not indicate a malfunction.
Enjoying Twin Piano Games
The RM-700 features an ear training game that makes use of the Twin Piano function. You can enjoy games such as listening to notes
played in the left part of the keyboard and playing the same notes in the right side, or displaying notes played in the left part of the
keyboard on the screen and playing the same note in the right side, all while getting real ear training practice.
1. In the “Twin Piano” screen, touch <Game>.
The “Twin Piano Game” screen appears.
2. Touch either <Listen to Sounds> or <Read Notations> to select the desired game.
Game
How it is used
After listening to the note for a key played by the player using the left section of the keyboard, the player on the right plays the
note he or she thinks is the same.
Listen to
Sounds
*
Several seconds after the player on the left poses the question, the note played appears in the notation to provide a hint.
The player using the left section of the keyboard plays a note to pose a question. That note is indicated in the notation.
The player on the right looks at the screen and then plays the note he or she thinks is the same.
Read
Notations
*
*
The player on the left should continue holding down the key for several seconds after presenting the question.
No sounds are played when the player on the left presses the keys for the question
3. One person presses a key in the left part of the keyboard to present a question.
4. The other person responds by pressing a key in the right part of the keyboard.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Displaying the Notation (DigiScore)
The RM-700 can display notations not only for the internal songs, but for music files and performances recorded with the RM-700.
This is very convenient for performing while reading the music and for checking songs that have been recorded. When you play back a
music file with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen.
A notation cannot be displayed for a song from a music CD and an audio/MP3 format.
Selecting the song
•
•
If you want to play back a song from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector first.
If you want to play back a song from CD-ROM, insert the CD-ROM into your CD drive first.
1. Select the song that you want to play back (p. 75).
2. Press the [DigiScore] button so its indicator is lit.
The notation of the selected song appears.
3. You can switch the type of notation screen by pressing the [DigiScore] button several times.
The RM-700 provides two types of notation screen. Each time you press the [DigiScore] button, the screen will change as follows.
Notation
Notation + Keyboard
Off
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
4. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to play the song.
The song will begin playing, and the notation pages will turn automatically as the song progresses.
5. Press the [
Notes about the DigiScore
•
In some internal songs, the fingering is displayed. The fingering numbers shown in the screen indicate one possible fingering.
You can add fingering numbers by using the Note Edit feature of the Song Edit function. For details, refer to “Editing Songs”
(p. 163).
•
•
•
Chord names can be displayed in some of the internal songs and recorded performances using the RM-700’s Chord Sequencer (p.
162).
When displaying the notation for a song from USB memory, or CD-ROM, or internal memory, it will take some time for the data to be
read from USB memory, CD-ROM, or internal memory, so you may have to wait for a while before the notation appears.
The displayed notation is generated from the music files, and gives priority to easy visibility in the screen rather than the accurate
depiction of complex or sophisticated performances. For this reason, it may differ from commercially available printed scores. In
particular, it is not suitable for depicting sophisticated or difficult pieces that require a detailed notation.
•
•
Notes will not appear in the screen if you select a part that contains no performance data. To change the part that’s displayed, refer
to “Detailed Settings for DigiScore” (p. 109).
Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds (Touch the Notes)
In the Notation screen, you can have notes played by touching the notes on the screen.
When you display the keyboard in the screen (p. 106), the keys on the keyboard for the notes you touch are then shown in the display.
This allows you confirm notes by sight, sound, and touch.
If you drag your finger across the notation while the song is stopped, the portion you’ve dragged across will play back.
This allows you to easily play back phrases you like.
If you touch a note while the song is playing, the song will continue playing from the location you touched.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Scrolling the Notation Along with the Performances (Auto Sync DigiScore)
You can have the notation displayed in the screen scroll automatically as you play, even when the song is not being played back. No
more frantically trying to turn to the next page in the notation while you are performing.
This also lets you play difficult passages more slowly and otherwise practice at your own pace.
*
Auto Sync DigiScore is linked to the performance of the part shown in the screen. The notation does not scroll if you are playing a
part that is not currently displayed.
When the Bouncing Ball is Blue
•
•
Start playing at the point where the ball is bouncing.
The bouncing ball follows along and the notation scrolls as you play.
When the Bouncing Ball is Red
•
If nothing is played for a short while, the bouncing ball turns red. At this time, if you play a phrase near the position of the
bouncing ball, the ball automatically moves to the point in the notation where you are playing.
When you play four or more notes while the bouncing ball is red, the ball moves to the point where you are playing.
When you play fewer than four notes, the bouncing ball does not jump to the new position, and the notation does not scroll.
The bouncing ball will move within the range of the notation displayed on the external display or television. If you start playing
at a point that is not currently shown in the external display or television, the bouncing ball does not jump to the new position,
and the notation does not scroll.
•
•
Under certain conditions, the bouncing ball may not move as expected.
You can change the Auto Sync DigiScore settings. Refer to p. 109.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Detailed Settings for DigiScore
You can change the part appearing on the notation display and change the manner in which the notation is displayed.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <DigiScore>.
The “DigiScore” screen appears.
Press the [DigiScore] button so it’s lit, then press the [Menu] button so it's lit; the “DigiScore” setting screen will appear.
You can select the parts to be displayed in the notation by touching the three icons at the lower left of the screen.
Icon
Description
The upper part and lower part are displayed.
The upper part is displayed.
The lower part is displayed.
3. To change the setting, touch
for the item you want to specify.
*
Touch
to switch pages.
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting (parameter) will return to its factory setting.
Item
Size
Setting
Small, Medium, Large, Extra Large
Sets the notation size.
Off
The notation screen does not scroll automatically.
The notation screen scrolls automatically. When the bouncing ball is blue,
playback begins from the point in the notation where the ball is set.
When the bouncing ball is red, and you start playing a phrase at a point in
the notation close to where the ball is located, the ball moves to the point
where you are playing. This position is determined after you play at least
four notes of the phrase.
Auto Sync
Sets the function whereby the notation screen
scrolls automatically as you play, even if the
song is not played back.
Jump
The notation screen scrolls automatically from the current position in the
song as you play.
Next Note
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Item
Setting
Off
Not displayed.
Pitches
C, D, E
The pitch names (C, D, E) are displayed.
The pitch names (fixed Do) are displayed.
Sets whether or not the note names appear in
the music.
The note name is not shown if the Size is set
to “Small.”
Do, Re, Mi (Fixed)
*
Do, Re, Mi
(Movable)
The syllable names (movable Do) are displayed.
Resolution
16th Note
32nd Note
Notes down to sixteenth notes are indicated.
Notes down to thirty-second notes are indicated.
Sets the minimum note length indicated in the
notation.
Auto
Key is switched automatically.
Key
Notation is displayed in the specified key.
b x 5–0–# x 6
Notation is displayed in the specified key.
Lyrics
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
The lyrics are displayed.
Not displayed.
This setting determines whether or not lyrics in
songs that contain lyrics data appear in the
notation.
Finger Numbers
The fingering is displayed.
Not displayed.
This setting determines whether or not the
fingering in songs that contain fingering data
appears in the notation.
Chords
The chord names are displayed.
Not displayed.
This setting determines whether or not chord
names in songs that contain chord data appears
in the notation.
The right-hand part is shown in the upper part notation, and the left-hand
part is shown in the lower part notation.
Grand Staff
Upper & Lower
Part 1–16
Specify the parts that will be shown in the left-
hand part notation and the right-hand part
notation.
The performance of the selected part will be detected automatically, and
shown in the right-hand part notation and the left-hand part notation.
Upper Part
Selects the part to display when “Upper” is
selected as the part to be displayed.
Right Track, Part 1–16
Left Track, Part 1–16
Lower Part
Selects the part to display when “Lower” is
selected as the part to be displayed.
Bouncing Ball
On
Off
The bouncing ball is displayed.
Not displayed.
This setting determines whether or not the
animated ball is shown bouncing in time with
the song as it is played back.
Auto
G Clef
F Clef
Auto
G Clef
F Clef
On
Display is switched automatically.
Clef R
Determines whether treble or bass clef is shown
in the notation for the right-hand part.
G (treble) clef is displayed in the notation.
F (bass) clef is displayed in the notation.
Display is switched automatically.
Clef L
Determines whether a treble or bass clef is
shown in the notation for the left-hand part.
G (treble) clef is displayed in the notation.
F (bass) clef is displayed in the notation.
The note is displayed in color.
Color Notation
This settings determines whether or not the
note in the current position is colored.
Off
Not displayed.
Start Position
This specifies the timing at which the notation
will start to be displayed.
First Note
Song Top
The notation will be shown from the first note.
The notation will be shown from the intro of the song.
If you save a song whose Key setting you've modified, the song will be saved at the specified key.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Saving Notations as Image Data
You can take notations that are displayed on the RM-700 and save them to external memories. You can also use saved image data to
your computer.
You cannot save copyrighted song data.
Other than for your own personal enjoyment, use of the notations that are output without the permission of the copyright
holder is prohibited by law.
1. Insert the USB memory onto which you want to save the image data in the RM-700’s External Memory connector.
2. Select the song that you wish to play back (p. 75).
3. Press the [DigiScore] button so its indicator is lit.
The notation of the selected song appears.
4. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
5. Touch <Export>.
The following message appears.
6. Touch <OK>.
The following screen appears.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
7. Touch the respective parameter and set the range of image data and other settings with the [Value] dial.
Item
Setting
Description
Start Measure
End Measure
Direction
Media
(song top) –
Selects the measure at which output begins.
Selects the measure at which output ends.
Sets the orientation of the notation being output.
Selects the media for the save destination.
– (song end)
Portrait, Landscape
Ext Memory, Disk
8. Touch <Execute>.
The notation is saved to the external memory as image data in BMP (bitmap) format.
Do not remove the external memory while “save” is in progress.
Saving Your Visual Lesson Performance Results
If you want to save your Visual Lesson performance results as graphic data, proceed as follows.
1. In step 12 of Visual Lesson (p. 102), touch <Export>.
2. Execute steps 5 through 8 of “Saving Notation as Image Data.”
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Adjusting the Tempo
This changes the song and Music Style tempos.
If songs seem difficult to play at their original speed, you may find it helpful to first practice with the tempo slowed down. Then, after
becoming more familiar with the song, you can practice it at a gradually faster tempo.
Changing the tempo has no effect on the pitch of the notes. And you can change the tempo even when the song is in progress.
1. Adjusting the Tempo with the Tempo [Slow] [Fast] buttons.
Pressing the Tempo [Slow] [Fast] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song to the basic tempo.
The value of the tempo currently set (10–500 beats per minute) can be checked in the screen.
Using the Pedal to Set the Tempo (Tap Tempo)
You can specify the tempo by pressing the pedal at the desired interval. This function is called “Tap Tempo.”
By using the Tap Tempo function, you can quickly set the tempo you are thinking of, without specifying the tempo in numerical terms.
Assigning Functions to the Pedals
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages. Touch
to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Pedal>.
The “Pedal” screen appears.
4. Touch <Left Pedal> or <Center Pedal>
to select “Tap Tempo.”
The pedal to which the “Tap Tempo” function is assigned will no longer operate as a piano performance pedal (soft pedal or
sostenuto pedal).
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Specifying the Tempo
6. Press the pedal to which you assigned “Tap Tempo” two or more times.
The tempo will be set to the interval at which you pressed the pedal.
Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo (Tempo Mute)
If a song has tempo changes, it helps to practice the song first at a steady tempo. Overriding tempo changes is called “Tempo Muting.”
1. Hold down the [
(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [Slow] [Fast] buttons.
When tempo muting is in effect, the tempo display appears in reverse video.
Cancel the Tempo Mute Setting
1. Hold down the [
(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [Slow] [Fast] buttons.
Tempo muting is canceled.
*
Tempo Mute will also be cancelled when you select a different song.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing (Count In)
When you’re playing along with a song, you can listen to the tempo before you start playing by adding a count-in.
This audible count before the song playback is called a “Count In.”
1. Press the [Count] button so its indicator is lit.
The “Count” screen appears.
*
Touch
to switch pages.
2. Touch <Count Mode>
to set this to “Count In” or “Count In/Down.”
With this setting, two measures count down before the song playback starts.
Cancelling the Count In
1. Press the [Count] button so its indicator is turned off.
By pressing [Exit] instead of the [Count] button, you can close the Count settings screen without cancelling the count.
•
•
You can have a count sound be played before the song starts playing back by holding down the [
(Prev)] button while you
press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.The status of the Count settings won’t be affected by your use of this procedure.
For more about other settings on the Count settings screen, refer to “Changing the Settings for the Count” (p. 171).
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Muting Some Parts Before Playing (Track Buttons)
With commercially available music files for piano lessons, the part for each hand can be played back independently. This makes it easy
to practice hands separately. For example, you can follow along with your right hand while you listen to that same right-hand part be
played, or you can practice the left-hand part while the right-hand part plays.
A music file for piano lessons may be assigned to the Track buttons as shown below.
Right-hand part
Left-hand part
Druns/SFX
By using these Track buttons, you can eliminate the sound of specific parts. This is referred to as “muting.”
“Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing Recordings)” (p. 131).
You cannot mute individual parts separately in audio/MP3 format or music CD song.
If a single Track button includes more than one instrument and you want to mute just one of those instruments, refer to
“Modifying the Settings of Each Part” (p. 157).
When playing back SMF files for Roland Piano Digital series instruments, and the [Left] button and [Right] button do not
correctly control the lower/ upper performances, please change the “Track Assign” settings.
Please refer to “Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During SMF Playback (Track Assign)” (p. 182).
1. Select the song that you wish to play back (p. 75).
Selecting the Part that You’ll be Playing
2. Press any one of the Track buttons to make the button’s indicator light go dark.
The sound for the selected part no longer plays.
For example, when practicing the right hand, press the [Right] button.
When you play back the song, the right-hand performance will not sound.
Practice your right-hand performance along with the left-hand playback.
Playing Back a Song
3. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button so its indicator is lit.
The song will begin playing back.
The part you selected in step 2 will not sound. Once again press the button you selected in step 2.
The button’s indicator will light up, and the part will be heard once again. Even while the song is playing, you can press the track
buttons to mute or un-mute the sound.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Stopping the Song
4. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button so its indicator is turned off.
The song will stop.
Using the Sound of a Specific Part as a “Guide” (Mute Volume)
If desired, you can specify that the sound of a track will play at a reduced volume rather than going completely silent when you press a
track button and turn off its indicator.
This setting lets you play a specific part at a reduced volume and use it as a “guide” for your playing.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages. Touch
to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Mute Volume>.
The “Mute Volume” screen appears.
4. Touch
muted.
for <Accomp Track>, <Left Track>, or <Right Track> to specify the volume for each track when it is
Value
0–80
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting (parameter) will return to its factory setting.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Setting Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker)
By setting markers at points in a song that you want to practice repeatedly, you can then easily go to and repeat play back of the
selected measures.
Placing a Marker within a Song
You can place two separate markers (Marker A and Marker B) in one song. These markers are placed at the beginning of a measure.
Placing markers is a handy way to start playback at the same place as many times as you like. You can add markers or move to a
marker even while playback is in progress.
1. Select the song in which you’ll set the markers (p. 75).
2. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
3. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages. Touch
to switch between the pages.
4. Touch <Marker>.
The Marker screen appears.
You can also access the Marker screen by touching <Marker> in the “Count” screen (p. 115).
Placing Markers
5. Go to the measure where you want to set a marker using the [
(Prev)] and [
(Next)] buttons.
The measure number shown in the upper part of the screen will change.
6. Touch <- - -> for Marker A.
Marker A is placed at the beginning of the measure you selected.
“- - -” on the screen will change to the number of the measure where you placed the marker.
7. In the same way, touch the Marker B <- - -> to set Marker B.
Marker B is placed.
*
It is not possible to assign marker B to the same location or a measure before marker A.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Playback from a Marker Location
1. At the marker screen, touch the measure number of the marker you want to go to.
Playback will start from wherever Marker A or Marker B are set.
When you play the song, playback starts from the position of the marker.
With the song playing back, playback will continue if you touch Marker A or Marker B on the Marker screen.
Erasing a Marker
1. Touch <Clear> for the marker you want to erase.
The marker disappears and the on-screen display changes to “- - -.”
Moving a Marker
You can move a marker that has been placed in a song. You can also move the section of music defined by Markers A and B forward or
back, without changing the number of measures of marked.
1. In the Marker screen, touch
or
for the marker to be moved.
When you touch
When you touch
, the marker is moved to a previous part of the song.
, the marker is moved to a later part of the song.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
Moving Markers A and B without Changing the Interval Between Them
1. In the Marker screen, touch
or
in the middle of the screen.
For example, if you have Marker A set at the beginning of the fifth measure, and Marker B set at the beginning of the ninth measure,
when you touch in the middle of the screen, Marker A is moved to the beginning of the first measure, and Marker B is moved to
the beginning of the fifth measure.
Touch
to shift Marker A to the beginning of the ninth measure and Marker B to the beginning of the thirteenth measure.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Measure
Marker A
Measure
Marker B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Marker A
Marker B
Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over
You can play back a particular passage over and over. This is convenient when you want to focus on a passage.
1. First, set Marker A and Marker B to define the measures you want to repeat.
For instance, suppose you want to play back the passage from the fifth through eighth measures over and over. You should place
Marker A at the beginning of the fifth bar and Marker B at the beginning of the ninth bar.
Off
On
2. Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen.
The setting is made for repeated playback of the passage from marker A to marker B.
When you play the song, the marked section of music plays back repeatedly.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
When <Repeat> is On
•
•
•
If neither Marker A nor Marker B is set, the song is played back from the beginning to the end.
If you only place marker A, playback repeats from marker A to the end of the song.
If you only place marker B, playback repeats from the beginning of the song to marker B.
Cancelling Repeat Playback
3. In the Marker screen, touch <Repeat> to turn off the button’s illumination.
Repeat playback is cancelled.
Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure
A marker is normally placed at the start of the selected measure, but you can also set it so that a marker is placed at a position partway
through a measure.
1. In the Marker screen, touch <Resolution>.
The “Resolution” screen appears.
2. Touch <Resolution>
to choose the marker setting.
Indication
Measure
Beat
Explanation
This lets you place a marker at the beginning of the measure.
This lets you place a marker at the beginning of the beat.
3. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
By using the “Transpose function,” you can transpose your performance without changing the notes you play. For example, even if the
song is in a difficult key with many sharps ( ) or flats ( ), you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to read and play.
You can also use this function to play back a song in a different key.
When accompanying a vocalist, you can easily transpose the pitch to a range that is comfortable for the singer, while still playing the
notes as written (i.e., with the same fingering positions).
You can also transpose the sound of a music CD or the sound from a portable audio player connected to the Roland Audio
Port (p. 195).
1. Select the song that you want to transpose (p. 75).
2. Press the [Transpose] button.
The “Transpose” screen appears.
3. Touch the Transpose icon.
Icon
Target
Settings Value
Keyboard sound
-6–0–5
Song to be played back
-6–0–5
-6–0–5
Keyboard sounds, songs being played back
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Practice Functions
4. Touch the screen keyboard
or
, to select the transposition value.
•
•
•
Each time you press
or
, it transposes the key by a semitone. When you touch
, a value of “0” is set.
You can also use the [Value] dial to change the transposition value.
When you transpose a song or the keyboard, the [Transpose] button’s indicator lights up. As you play the keyboard or play back the
song, the notes are transposed.
•
When you press the [Exit] button, the transposition remains in effect, and you’re returned to the previous screen.
The transposition value reverts to “0” when you turn off the power or select another song.
Cancelling Transposition
5. Press the [Transpose] button so its indicator is turned off.
Transposition is cancelled.
The next time you press the [Transpose] button, illuminating the indicator, the music is transposed by the value set here.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
The RM-700 lets you record your own performances.
You can record yourself playing along with a song, or play back your recorded performance and listen to it.
The RM-700 lets you record in the following ways.
Your performance will be recorded as an SMF format song.
•
•
•
Recording only your own keyboard performance
SMF recording
Recording your performances using automatic accompaniment
Recording your performance along with an internal song or SMF music data from USB
memory or a CD
Your performance will be recorded as an audio file.
•
•
•
Recording only your own keyboard performance
Recording your performances using automatic accompaniment
Recording your performance along with an internal song or SMF format song from USB
memory or a CD
•
•
•
•
Recording your performance along with an audio song from USB memory or a CD
Recording your performance along with a song from a music CD
Recording performances and vocals
Audio recording
Recording audio input from the Roland Audio Port
Even if you’ve made equalizer or brilliance settings, they will not be used for audio recording.
You can’t record your performance along with an MP3 format song.
Note: USB memory is required for audio recording.
Since audio recording writes the data directly to USB memory, you can’t recording unless USB memory is connected to the
External Memory connector.
You must connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector before recording.
If the following screen appears
If you attempt to select a different song when a song has already been recorded, a screen like the following will appear.
If it is ok to delete the song you recorded, touch <OK>. If you don’t want to delete the song, touch <Cancel> to cancel the song
selection, and save the song you recorded (p. 134).
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
SMF Recording
Recording a New Song (New Song)
Here’s how to record your keyboard performance without using an internal song or automatic accompaniment.
Settings for Recording Performances
1. Press One Touch Program [Piano] button.
This sets the RM-700 for performance without the use of Automatic Accompaniment.
2. Decide on the tone of the performance (p. 34).
Use the Tone buttons and the touch screen to select the tone.
When you have finished choosing the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the Basic screen.
Recording Settings
3. Press the [ (Rec)] button.
The following screen appears.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
4. Touch <SMF>.
The [
(Rec)] button will light, and the following screen appears.
This screen will not appear if “New Song” is selected.
In this case, proceed to step 6.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
5. Touch <NewSong>.
The [
(Play/Stop)] button will blink, and the RM-700 will enter recording-standby mode.
6. Decide on the tempo and beat.
If necessary, press the [Metronome] button to play the metronome.
When you have finished making the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the Basic screen.
Start Recording
7. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts.
Even without pressing the [
(Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you play the keyboard. There is no count-in played
when you start by playing rather than pushing the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
When recording starts, the [
(Play/Stop)] and [
(Rec)] buttons’ indicators light up.
Stop Recording
8. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Recording stops.
The performance is recorded to the [Right] button.
Play Back the Recorded Performance
9. Press the [
(Prev)] button, then press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The recorded performance is played back.
When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.
Track Buttons Assignments for Recorded Performances
When you record only a keyboard performance, the performance will be assigned to the track buttons as follows.
•
•
•
Normal performance (playing a single Tone from the entire keyboard)
The performance is recorded to the [Right] button.
Layer performance
The performance is recorded to the [Right] button.
Split performance
The lower part of the keyboard is recorded to the [Left] button, and the upper part of the keyboard is recorded to the
[Right] button.
•
•
Layer performance and Split performance
The lower part of the keyboard is recorded to the [Left] button, and the upper part of the keyboard is recorded to the
[Right] button.
Drum set or sound effect performance
Recorded on the [Accomp] button.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording With Accompaniment
Try recording a performance along with the Automatic Accompaniment.
Settings for Recording Performances
1. Press the One Touch Program [Rhythm] button.
This chooses the setting for Automatic Accompaniment.
2. Decide on the Music Style.
When you have finished choosing the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the Basic screen.
Recording Settings
3. Press the [ (Rec)] button.
The following screen appears.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
4. Touch <SMF>.
The [
(Rec)] button will light, and the following screen appears.
This screen will not appear if “New Song” is selected.
In this case, proceed to step 6.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
5. Touch <NewSong>.
The [
(PLAY/STOP)] button will blink, and the RM-700 will enter recording-standby mode.
6. Decide on the tempo.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Start Recording
7. Play a chord on the lower part of the keyboard.
An Automatic Accompaniment intro starts, and recording starts at the same time.
Stop Recording
8. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
An ending plays, then the Automatic Accompaniment, and recording stop at the same time.
9. Press the [
(Prev)] button, then press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The recorded performance is played back.
When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.
•
You can change how recording is stopped when recording a performance with Automatic Accompaniment. To learn how, see
“Changing How Recording Stops” (p. 132).
Track Buttons Assignments for Recorded Performances
Performances that have been recorded using Automatic Accompaniment are assigned to the track buttons as shown below.
Track button
[Accomp]
Performance Recorded
The automatic accompaniment and the chord tone/bass tone are recorded here.
In addition, drum sets and sound effects that are selected with the keys in a performance are recorded to this track.
When the RM-700 is set so that sounds from performances on the left-hand side of the keyboard are played while the
[Left]
Automatic Accompaniment sounds (p. 68), your own performance on the left-hand side of the keyboard is recorded
here.
Your own performance on the right-hand side of the keyboard is recorded here.
When using Piano Style accompaniment (p. 69), the performance played on the keyboard is recorded here.
[Right]
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording Along With a Song
Try recording along with internal songs and songs on external memories.
Here, record your right-hand performance along with the song accompaniment.
Settings for Recording Performances
1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
2. Select a song (p. 75).
3. Decide on the tone and tempo of the performance.
The song tempo is stored within the song you selected.
4. Press the [DigiScore] button to view the notation.
Recording Settings
5. Press the [ (Rec)] button.
The following screen appears.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
6. Touch <SMF>.
The [
(Rec)] button will light, and the following screen appears.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
7. Touch <Add On>.
The following screen appears.
Selecting the Track to Record
8. Press the track button for the track that you want to record (i.e., the track that you want to play yourself).
The indicator of the button you pressed will blink, and the RM-700 enters recording-standby mode.
Since in this example we will record the upper part performance, press the [Right] button to make the button’s indicator light blink.
Only the automatic accompaniment and the drum set or SFX set can be recorded to the [Accomp] button.
Start Recording
9. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts.
Even without pressing the [
(Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you play the keyboard. There is no count-in played
when you start by playing rather than pushing the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
When recording starts, the [
(Play/Stop)] and [
(Rec)] buttons’ indicators light up.
Stop Recording
10. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Recording stops.
Play Back the Recorded Performance
11. Press the [
(Prev)] button, then press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The recorded performance is played back.
When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing Recordings)
When you want to re-record, specify the Track button for the performance you want to re-record, and then record again.
When you select a previously recorded Track button and re-record, everything from the point at which you begin recording up to the
point where you stop recording will be replaced by the newly re-recorded performance.
1. Access the DigiScore screen (p. 106).
2. Use the [Value] dial to move to the measure that you want to re-record.
3. Press the [ (Rec)] button.
The following screen appears.
This screen will not appear if USB memory is not connected to the External
Memory connector.
In this case, proceed to step 5.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
4. Touch <SMF>.
The [
(Rec)] button will light, and the following screen appears.
This screen will not appear if “New Song” is selected.
In this case, proceed to step 6.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
5. Touch <Add On>.
The [
(Play/Stop)] button will blink, and the RM-700 will enter recording-standby mode.
6. Press the Track button for the track you want to re-record.
The indicator for the selected Track button starts blinking.
7. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to begin recording.
Rerecording the Accompaniment Part of Automatic Accompaniment
When rerecording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, set Sync Start (p. 63), then specify a chord or press the [Start/Stop]
button.
8. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to stop recording.
If you also want to rerecord the ending of the Automatic Accompaniment, press the [Intro/Ending] button.
•
The song tempo is stored within the song you selected. If you want to change the tempo of the recorded song, refer to “Changing
the Tempo of Recorded Songs” (p. 169) and “Changing the Tempo Within the Song” (p. 169).
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Deleting Recorded Performances
You can use the following method to delete a recorded performance.
1. Hold down the [Song] button and press the [ (Rec)] button.
The following screen appears.
2. Touch <OK>.
This deletes the recorded song.
When you touch <Cancel>, the song selection screen or basic screen appears and the recorded song is not deleted.
Deleting the Performance on Specific Tracks
You can select and delete performances on specific tracks.
1. Hold down the Track button for the track containing the performance you want to delete,
then press the [ (Rec)] button.
The Track button’s light goes dark, and the recorded music is deleted.
Changing How Recording Stops
When recording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, you can change the accompaniment and the way recording mode
stops.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages. Touch
to switch between the pages.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
3. Touch <Composer>.
The “Composer” screen appears.
4. Touch <Rec Stop>
to switch between “Arranger Stop” and “Composer Stop.”
Display
Explanation
Arranger Stop
Recording stops at the same time the Automatic Accompaniment stops.
Recording does not stop, even when the Automatic Accompaniment stops.
Composer Stop
When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, recording stops.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making settings.
Recording Songs Starting with Pickups
Count Sound
~
Measure
-2
PU
1
Recording begins here
1. Prepare for recording as described in steps 1–5 of “Recording a New Song (New Song)” (p. 125).
If the [
(Rec)] button’s indicator is not lit, press the [
(Rec)] button so the indicator is lit. The RM-700 is put in recording standby.
2. Press the [
(Prev)] button one time.
The measure number in the upper of the Basic screen changes to “PU,” and the RM-700 is set to record a song starting with a pickup.
3. Start recording.
After a one-measure count, recording begins.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Saving Songs
If you record a performance and then simply turn off the RM-700’s power without saving it, the recorded performance will disappear.
If you want to keep the recording, you must save it to “Favorites.”
1. Press the [Song] button so its indicator is lit.
The Song selection screen appears.
2. Touch <File>.
The “Song File Menu” screen appears.
3. Touch <Save/Rename>.
The “Save Song” screen appears.
Determining the Name of the Song to be Saved
*
If you don’t need to rename the song, proceed to step 8.
4. Touch <Rename>.
The “Rename” screen appears.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
5. Touch
to move the cursor.
6. Enter the desired characters.
Icon
Explanation
Enters a character at the cursor location.
For example, each time you touch the <ABC> icon, the character to be entered will cycle in the order of A → B → C → A...
< ABC >–< YZ >
Cycles you through the available selections for the character type, in this order: “Uppercase letters,” “Lowercase letters,”
“Numerals,” “Symbols.”
< A–a–0–! >
< Ins >
< Del >
Insert a space at the cursor position.
Delete the character at the cursor position.
7. When you’ve specified the desired name, touch <Execute>.
Determining the Save Destination
8. Touch <Media>
9. Touch <File>
to select the save-destination storage media.
to select the save-destination song number.
If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number.
If you select a number with a previously saved song and then proceed to save a new song, the previously saved song will be erased.
If you do not want to lose a saved song, select a number with no song name indicated in the save-destination column.
Save
10. Touch <Execute>.
The song will be saved.
•
Never disconnect the USB memory or turn off the power while the “Saving...” indication is shown.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Audio Recording
You must connect USB memory to the External Memory connector. Audio recording is not possible if USB memory is not
connected.
Recording a New Song (New Song)
Here’s how to record your keyboard performance without using an internal song or automatic accompaniment.
Settings for Recording Performances
1. Press One Touch Program [Piano] button.
This sets the RM-700 for performance without the use of Automatic Accompaniment.
2. Decide on the tone of the performance (p. 34).
Use the Tone buttons and the touch screen to select the tone.
When you have finished choosing the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the Basic screen.
Recording Settings
3. Press the [ (Rec)] button.
The following screen appears.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
4. Touch <Audio>.
The [
(Rec)] button will light, and the following screen appears.
This screen will not appear if “New Song” is selected.
In this case, proceed to step 6.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
5. Touch <NewSong>.
The [
(Play/Stop)] button will blink, and the RM-700 will enter recording-standby mode.
Start Recording
6. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
When recording starts, the [
(Play/Stop)] and [
(Rec)] buttons’ indicators light up.
Stop Recording
7. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Recording will stop, and the “Rename” screen appears.
*
If you don’t need to rename the song, proceed to step 10.
8. Touch
to move the cursor.
9. Enter the desired characters.
Icon
Explanation
Enters a character at the cursor location.
For example, each time you touch the <ABC> icon, the character to be entered will cycle in the order of A → B → C → A...
< ABC >–< YZ >
< A–0 >
< Del >
Switches between entering letters and numbers.
Delete the character at the cursor position.
10. When you’ve specified the desired name, touch <Execute>.
The recorded song will be saved to USB memory.
Play Back the Recorded Performance
11. Press the [Song] button so its indicator is lit.
The Song selection screen appears.
12. Touch <Ext Memory>, and then select the song that you recorded.
13. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The recorded performance is played back.
When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording With Accompaniment
Try recording a performance along with the Automatic Accompaniment.
Settings for Recording Performances
1. Press the One Touch Program [Rhythm] button.
This chooses the setting for Automatic Accompaniment.
2. Decide on the Music Style.
When you have finished choosing the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the Basic screen.
Recording Settings
3. Press the [ (Rec)] button.
The following screen appears.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
4. Touch <Audio>.
The [
(Rec)] button will light, and the following screen appears.
This screen will not appear if “New Song” is selected.
In this case, proceed to step 6.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
5. Touch <NewSong>.
The [
(Play/Stop)] button will blink, and the RM-700 will enter recording-standby mode.
6. Decide on the tempo.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Start Recording
7. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
When recording starts, the [
(Play/Stop)] and [
(Rec)] buttons’ indicators light up.
8. Play the keyboard or press the [Start/Stop] button.
Automatic accompaniment will start.
Stop Recording
9. Press the [Intro/Ending] or [Start/Stop] button.
Automatic accompaniment will stop.
10. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Recording will stop, and the “Rename” screen appears.
*
If you don’t need to change the name of the song, proceed to step 13.
11. Touch
to move the cursor.
12. Enter the desired characters.
Icon
Explanation
Enters a character at the cursor location.
For example, each time you touch the <ABC> icon, the character to be entered will cycle in the order of A → B → C → A...
< ABC >–< YZ >
< A–0 >
< Del >
Switches between entering letters and numbers.
Delete the character at the cursor position.
13. When you’ve specified the desired name, touch <Execute>.
The recorded song will be saved to USB memory.
Play Back the Recorded Performance
14. Press the [Song] button so its indicator is lit.
The Song selection screen appears.
15. Touch <Ext Memory>, and then select the song that you recorded.
16. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The recorded performance is played back. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording Along With a Song
Try recording along with internal songs and songs on external memories.
Settings for Recording Performances
1. Select a song (p. 75).
2. Decide on the tone and tempo of the performance.
3. Press the [DigiScore] button to display the notation.
Recording Settings
4. Press the [ (Rec)] button.
The following screen appears.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
5. Touch <Audio>.
The [
(Rec)] button will light, and the following screen appears.
*
If you decide not to record, touch <Cancel>.
6. Touch <Add On>.
The [
(Play/Stop)] button will blink, and the RM-700 will enter recording-standby mode.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Start Recording
7. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
When recording starts, the [
(Play/Stop)] and [
(Rec)] buttons’ indicators light up.
Stop Recording
8. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Recording will stop, and the “Rename” screen appears.
*
If you don’t need to change the name of the song, proceed to step 11.
9. Touch
to move the cursor.
10. Enter the desired characters.
Icon
Explanation
Enters a character at the cursor location.
For example, each time you touch the <ABC> icon, the character to be entered will cycle in the order of A → B → C → A...
< ABC >–< YZ >
< A–0 >
< Del >
Switches between entering letters and numbers.
Delete the character at the cursor position.
11. When you’ve specified the desired name, touch <Execute>.
The recorded song will be saved to USB memory.
Play Back the Recorded Performance
12. Press the [Song] button so its indicator is lit.
The Song selection screen appears.
13. Touch <Ext Memory>, and then select the song that you recorded.
14. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The recorded performance is played back. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Deleting Saved Songs
This deletes songs that have been saved on USB memory, or to “Favorites.”
*
To delete a song on a USB memory, first connect the USB memory to the External memory connector.
1. Press the [Song] button so its indicator is lit.
The Song selection screen appears.
2. Touch <File>.
The “Song File Menu” screen appears.
3. Touch <Delete>.
The “Delete Song” screen appears.
4. Touch <Media>
5. Touch <File>
to select the storage media.
to select the song to be deleted.
6. Touch <Execute>.
The selected song is deleted.
•
Never turn off the power or eject the USB memory while the display indicates “Executing...”
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Copying Songs from USB Memory to “Favorites”
Songs that’ve been saved on USB memory can be copied to “Favorites.”
*
Before you continue, connect the USB memory containing the song to the External Memory connector.
1. Press the [Song] button so its indicator is lit.
The Song selection screen appears.
2. Touch <File>.
The “Song File Menu” screen appears.
3. Touch <Copy>.
The “Copy Song” screen appears.
4. Touch the <File>
to select the song you want to copy.
When “All” is selected, all of the songs on the USB memory are copied to “Favorites.”
5. Touch the large arrow icon in the center of the screen to make it point downward.
6. Touch Favorites <File> to select the copy destination for the song.
If a song name is displayed with a number, a song is already saved to that number.
If you select a number with previously saved song data and proceed to copy to that location, the previously saved song will be erased.
If you don’t want to erase a previously saved song, choose a number with no song name appears in the destination column.
7. Touch <Execute>.
The song from the USB memory is copied to “Favorites.”
•
Never turn off the power or eject the USB memory while the display indicates “Copying...”
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Saving the Performance
Copying Songs from “Favorites” to USB Memory
Songs that’ve been saved in “Favorites” can be copied to USB memory.
As described in step 5 of “Copying Songs from USB Memory to ‘Favorites’,” touch the arrow icon in the center of the screen to make
the arrow point upward.
This sets the RM-700 to copy the song in “Favorites” to the USB memory.
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying songs from USB memory to “Favorites.”
•
•
Some song data cannot copy because they are copy protected.
Never turn off the power or eject the USB memory while the display indicates “Copying...”
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Music CD
Here’s how you can create a music CD by writing audio-recorded songs to a CD-R disc.
After you’ve finished writing the songs, carry out the “Finalize” process to complete your music CD.
Note When Creating a Music CD
•
•
You can’t write SMF format songs to a CD-R.
A song that’s shorter than four seconds cannot be written to CD-R.
Usable discs
Unused CD-R, or unfinalized CD-R
Maximum recording time
Number of recordable songs
650 MB: approximately 74 minutes, 700 MB: approximately 80 minutes
Maximum of 99 songs
What’s finalization?
Finalization is the process of writing final information (the number of songs, the song numbers, the playback times, etc.) to a
CD-R disc. When you “finalize” a CD-R disc that was recorded or written by the RM-700, that disc will be playable as a music CD
in another CD player.
*
After finalization, it will no longer be possible to record or write additional material to that disc. You should finalize the disc
when you have completed your music CD and don’t need to write or record any more data.
Writing Songs to a CD-R Disc
*
Before you continue, connect the USB memory containing the audio-recorded songs to the External Memory connector.
1. Insert an unused CD-R disc or an unfinalized CD-R disc into the CD drive.
2. Press the [Song] button so its indicator is lit.
The Song Selection screen appears.
3. Select the audio/MP3 format song that you want to write to the CD-R.
4. Touch <File>.
The “Song File Menu” screen appears.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Music CD
5. Touch <Write to CD>.
The following screen appears.
6. Touch <OK>.
*
If you decide not to write, touch < Cancel >.
If a CD-R disc is inserted in the CD drive, and you select a song that’s less than
four seconds in length and touch <Write to CD>, the message shown at right
will appear.
If this occurs, touch <OK> and then re-select a song that can be written to
disc.
The following screen (“Concerning Copyrights”) appears.
7. Touch <OK>.
The following screen (“About the License Agreement”) appears.
*
If you decide not to write, touch <No>.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Music CD
8. Touch < OK >.
The song will be written to the disc.
Never turn off the power while the “Writing...” indication is shown.
When writing has been completed, the following screen appears.
When writing is finished, the disc will be finalized to complete the music CD.
No further data can be written to a CD-R disc that has been finalized, even if space remains on the disc.
OK
The disc will not be finalized when writing is finished.
After the tracks have been written, you will still be able to add more tracks if space remains on the disc.
Cancel
9. Touch <OK> or <Cancel>.
If you touch <OK>, finalization will begin, and when it is completed you will return to the Song File Menu screen.
Never turn off the power while the “Executing...” indication is shown.
*
If you touch <Cancel>, you will return to the main screen.
If You Want to Write Additional Songs to the Disc
10. Repeat steps 3–9 as necessary.
•
We cannot guarantee that a music CD created on the RM-700 will play on all CD players. Depending on your CD player’s support for
CD-R discs, music CDs you create may not play correctly.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Music CD
Preparing a CD-R Disc for Playback on Another CD Player (Finalize)
After you’ve written the desired songs to a CD-R, you’ll need to perform the following “Finalize” operation so that the CD can be
played by a conventional CD player as a music CD.
1. Insert an unfinalized CD-R disc into the CD drive.
2. Press the [Song] button so its indicator is lit.
The Song Selection screen appears.
3. Touch <File>.
The “Song File Menu” screen appears.
4. Touch <Finalize CD>.
A screen like the following appears.
The disc will be finalized to complete the music CD.
No further data can be written to a CD-R disc that has been finalized, even if space remains on the disc.
OK
The disc will not be finalized when writing is finished.
After the tracks have been written, you will still be able to add more tracks if space remains on the disc.
Cancel
5. Touch <OK>.
Finalization will begin, and when it is completed you will return to the Song File Menu screen.
•
•
Never turn off the power while the “Executing...” indication is shown.
We cannot guarantee that a music CD created on the RM-700 will play on all CD players. Depending on your CD player’s support for
CD-R discs, music CDs you create may not play correctly.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Your Performance Settings (User Program)
The currently selected buttons and automatic accompaniment settings can all be saved as a
“user program.” Up to forty user programs can be stored in the RM-700.
Buttons [1] through [5] can each hold eight user programs.
In addition, these forty user programs can be saved to external memory in a single file, and you
can load this file back into the RM-700 when desired.
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
For details on the settings that are saved in a user program, refer to p. 225.
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
Performance Settings
Write
RM-700
User Memory
User Program
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Save
Load
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
Max. 500 User Program Sets
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
40 User Programs
(1 User Program Set)
Copy
Copy
USB Memory
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Save
Load
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
Max. 500 User Program Sets
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Your Performance Settings (User Program)
Determining the name of the User Programs
Storing a “User Program”
*
If you don’t need to rename the user program, proceed to step 8.
4. Touch <Rename>.
The “Rename” screen appears.
1. Set the Music Style, Tone, and other data until the
settings are the way you want them.
2. Press the [User Program] button so its indicator is lit.
5. Touch
to move the cursor.
The User Program selection screen appears.
6. Enter the desired characters.
Icon
Explanation
Enters a character at the cursor location.
For example, each time you touch the <ABC> icon, the
character to be entered will cycle in the order of A → B
→ C → A...
< ABC >–< YZ >
Cycles you through the available selections for the
character type, in this order: “Uppercase letters,”
“Lowercase letters,” “Numerals,” “Symbols.”
< A–a–0–! >
< Ins >
< Del >
Insert a space at the cursor position.
Delete the character at the cursor position.
3. Touch <Write>.
The “Write User Program” screen appears.
7. When you’ve specified the desired name, press the [Exit]
button.
Determining the Write Destination
8. Touch
to select the write-destination number.
The current performance settings are saved to the [User Program]
button.
•
•
Never turn off the power while the “Writing...” indication is shown.
You can restore the content registered to the [User Program] button
to the original factory settings. Refer to “Restoring the Factory
Settings (Factory Reset)” (p. 190).
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Your Performance Settings (User Program)
Calling Up Saved User Programs
Saving the User Program Sets
You can take the 40 user programs saved to the [User Program]
button and save them as a set to a USB memory, or to user memory.
*
If you want to save the user program set to USB memory, connect
your USB memory to the External Memory connector now.
1. Press the [User Program] button so its indicator is lit.
The User Program selection screen appears.
2. Touch <File>.
The “User Program File Menu” screen appears.
1. Press the [User Program] button so its indicator is lit.
The User Program selection screen appears.
3. Touch <Save>.
The “Save User Program” screen appears.
2. Press one of the [1]–[5] buttons to recall the user
program that was stored at that button.
The current performance settings will change to the settings of the
selected user program.
*
By touching
, you can switch between screens without
recalling a user program.
3. Touch the name to select a variation for the user
program.
Giving a Name to a Set of User Programs
The current performance settings will change to the settings of the
selected user program.
*
If you don’t need to rename the user program, proceed to step 8.
*
*
You can also use the [Value] dial to select variations.
4. Touch <Rename>.
Information about which variation you’ve selected from the eight
that are available is stored to the [1]–[5] buttons.
The “Rename” screen appears.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Your Performance Settings (User Program)
5. Touch
to move the cursor.
Loading Saved User Program Sets
6. Enter the desired characters.
Here’s how a user program set you saved to USB memory or user
memory can be loaded back into the RM-700.
Icon
Explanation
Enters a character at the cursor location. For example,
each time you touch the <ABC> icon, the character to
be entered will cycle in the order of A → B → C → A...
Note that calling up these user programs results in the deletion
of all user programs currently recorded to the [User Program]
button.
< ABC >–< YZ >
Cycles you through the available selections for the
character type, in this order: “Uppercase letters,”
“Lowercase letters,” “Numerals,” “Symbols.”
< A–a–0–! >
*
If you want to load from USB memory, connect your USB memory to
the External Memory connector now.
< Ins >
< Del >
Insert a space at the cursor position.
1. Press the [User Program] button so its indicator is lit.
Delete the character at the cursor position.
The User Program selection screen appears.
7. When you’ve specified the desired name, press the [Exit]
button.
2. Touch <File>.
The “User Program File Menu” screen appears.
Determining the Save Destination
8. Touch <Media>
storage media.
to select the save- destination
9. Touch <File>
program number.
to select the save-destination user
Where there is a name shown for a number, it means that there is a
user program set stored there.
3. Touch <Load>.
The “Load User Program” screen appears.
If you select a number with previously saved user program set data,
then save a new set of data to that same number, the older user
program set will be deleted. If you don’t want to lose any previously
saved user programs, select a number in the save-destination
column that does not yet have a name.
Saving
10. Touch <Execute>.
*
The user program set will be saved.
Specifying the Set of User Programs to be Loaded
4. Touch an icon to select the storage media to be read
from.
•
Never disconnect the USB memory or turn off the power while the
“Saving...” indication is shown.
5. Touch the name of user program to load.
6. Touch <Execute>.
The selected user programs are loaded to the [User Program]
button.
•
Never disconnect the USB memory or turn off the power while the
“Loading...” indication is shown.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Your Performance Settings (User Program)
Deleting Saved User Program Sets
Copying Sets of User Programs on
USB Memory to the User Memory
You can delete individual user program sets saved to USB memory
or in user memory.
You can copy sets of user programs saved on USB memory to user
memory.
*
If you want to delete a user program set from USB memory, connect
your USB memory to the External Memory connector now.
You can also copy sets of user programs saved in user memory to
USB memory.
1. Press the [User Program] button so its indicator is lit.
The User Program selection screen appears.
1. Connect the USB memory with the settings to be copied
to the External Memory connector.
2. Touch <File>.
The “User Program File Menu” screen appears.
2. Press the [User Program] button so its indicator is lit.
The User Program selection screen appears.
3. Touch <File>.
The “User Program File Menu” screen appears.
3. Touch <Delete>.
The “Delete User Program” screen appears.
4. Touch <Copy>.
The “Copy User Program” screen appears.
4. Touch <Media>
to select the storage media.
5. Touch
deleted.
to select the set of user programs to be
6. Touch <Execute>.
Specifying the Copy Source
The selected user programs are deleted.
5. Touch <Media>
to select the storage media.
6. Touch <File>
you want to copy.
to select the set of user programs
•
Never disconnect the USB memory or turn off the power while the
“Executing...” indication is shown.
When “All” is selected, all of the sets of user programs on the USB
memory are copied to user memory.
7. Touch the large arrow icon in the center to point the
arrow downwards.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Your Performance Settings (User Program)
Specifying the Copy Destination
User Program Settings
8. Touch <User>
to select the copy destination for
1. Press the [User Program] button so its indicator is lit.
the set of user programs.
The User Program selection screen appears.
Where there is a name shown for a number, it means that there is a
user program set stored there.
2. Touch <Settings>.
If you select a number with user programs data, and then copy data
to that number, the previously saved user programs are deleted. If
you do not want to delete the saved user programs, select a number
in the save-destination column for which no name is displayed.
The following screen appears.
9. Touch <Execute>.
The set of user programs on the USB memory is saved to user
memory.
•
Never disconnect the USB memory or turn off the power while the
“Copying...” indication is shown.
*
There are two setting screen. Touch
to switch screens.
Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the
User Memory to USB Memory
3. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
You can take user program sets saved in user memory and copy
them to USB memory.
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
In this case, in the Copy user programs screen in Step 7 above, touch
the large arrow icon in the center to get the arrow to point up.
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
4. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs
(Pedal Shift)
You can assign the function of the sequential switching of the “user
programs” to the pedal. That way, each time you depress the pedal,
the RM-700 switches to the next user program.
Great for use in concerts and similar situations, this allows you to
prepare and save your user programs in the sequence they are to be
used, and then call up user programs in the appropriate order while
you perform, simply by depressing the pedal.
This sets the RM-700 to copy the user program set in the user
memory to the USB memory.
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying sets of
user program set from USB memory to user memory.
Display
Off
Explanation
You can use a function assigned to the pedal.
The left pedal is dedicated to switching user
programs.
Left Pedal
The function assigned to the left pedal cannot be
used.
The center pedal is dedicated to switching user
programs.
Center Pedal
The function assigned to the center pedal cannot be
used.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Your Performance Settings (User Program)
Sequential Loading of User Program Sets
Stored (Load Next)
Simultaneously Switching User Program
and Transmitting PC Numbers
When using the pedal to switch your user programs, you can also
call up sequential sets of user programs as saved to USB memory.
This feature is called the “Load Next” function.
You can have PC (Program Change) numbers be transmitted to an
external MIDI device when you switch the user program on the RM-
700.
You can register PC number settings to each of the user programs,
just as you can with button settings and other settings preferences.
Display
Off
Explanation
Switches Load Next off.
The next press of the pedal after the 40th user program is
called up returns you to the first user program of the
same user program set.
Switches Load Next on.
The next press of the pedal after the 40th user program
has been called up takes you to the first user program in
the next user program set.
On
Changing the Timing at Which Arranger
Settings are Recalled (Arranger Update)
Bank Select MSB/Bank Select LSB
If desired, you can specify that when you recall a stored user
program, the settings for automatic accompaniment will not
change unless you continue pressing one of the [1]–[5] buttons for a
short while or continue touching the user program name shown in
the screen for a short while.
Value
0 (00H)–127 (7FH)
Program Change
Value
Display
Explanation
1 (00H)–128 (7FH)
If you press and immediately release one of the [1]–[5]
buttons, or touch and immediately release the user
program name shown in the screen, only the settings
that are not related to automatic accompaniment will
change.
If you hold down one of the [1]–[5] buttons or continue
touching the user program name shown in the screen,
the automatic accompaniment settings will also change.
Tx PC Channel
Value
Explanation
Delayed
Off
This prevents the PC number from being transmitted.
Sets the transmission channel.
Channel 1–16
When you touch one of the [1]–[5] buttons or touch the
user program name shown in the screen, the contents of
the corresponding user program will be selected
immediately.
Instant
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
You can’t edit music CD songs or audio/MP3 format songs.
Commercially Available Music Files
Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts
(16-Track Sequencer)
Commercially available song file recorded in Roland’s SMF format is
also composed of sixteen parts.
By loading the song file from the external memory and using the 16-
Track Sequencer, you can then also edit the song file.
“Multitrack Recording” refers to the process whereby you listen to
the playback of parts that have already been recorded while you
play the music for another part you are recording, thus adding
material to the previous recording.
With some commercially available music files, you cannot edit
the data.
The RM-700 is capable of multitrack recording of up to sixteen parts.
Since each part’s performance is recorded using one tone, you can
layer performances, using up to sixteen tones for the data in one
song. The function used to layer these sixteen parts, one at a time, is
called the “16-Track Sequencer.”
The 16-Track Sequencer Screen
When recording with 16-track Sequencer, display the 16-track
Sequencer screen.
16-Track Sequencer
You can record performances for up to 16 parts,
overlaying them part by part, to create a single song.
1. Press the [Menu] button, getting indicator to light.
2. Touch <Song Creation>.
Part 1
Flute Part
Part 2
Bass Part
Part 3
Piano Part (left hand)
3. Touch <16 Track Seq.>
Part 4
Piano Part (right hand)
A “16-track Sequencer screen” like the one shown below appears.
•
•
•
Part 16
16-Track Sequencer and Track Buttons
In addition to the “16-Track Sequencer” function, the “Track
Buttons” (p. 116) are another of the unit’s playing/recording
functions.
These three “Track buttons” are used for organizing the 16-Track
Sequencer’s sixteen parts. This allows you to use the 16-Track
Sequencer to add more sounds to performances recorded with the
Track buttons, and make even more detailed edits of the songs.
Display
1–16
Explanation
You can easily play back the original song data with the 16-Track
Sequencer, mute parts by pressing the Track buttons, and more.
The sound assigned to each part will be displayed.
The part you selected by touching the screen.
below.
Parts displayed as dark:
Track button
[Accomp]
[Lower]
Part
Parts displayed as light:
A performance has not been recorded for these parts.
1, 2, 5–16
<Solo>
<Mute>
<Clear>
Only the selected Part is played back.
3
4
This allows you to prevent the sound for the selected part
from playing.
[Upper]
The performance data for the selected part is deleted.
Since the 16-Track Sequencer records one tone to one part, you
cannot use Layer performance (p. 38), Split performance (p. 39), or
other such functions to record two or more tones simultaneously.
Also, you can’t record the performance with Automatic
Accompaniment.
This displays the Part Settings screen, in which you can
make detailed settings for each part. For details refer to p.
157.
<Part>
When you want to record with Automatic Accompaniment, then
you should use the Track buttons for recording. (Refer to “Recording
With Accompaniment” (p. 127, p. 138)
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
4. Touch
setting.
for the corresponding item to change the
Modifying the Settings of Each Part
You can adjust the values by touching the desired parameter and
turning the dial or by touching and dragging the slider.
You can change the Tones and volume, as well as mute the
playback, for each individual part in songs recorded with the 16-
track Sequencer and the internal songs.
Display
Volume
Reverb
Chorus
Explanation
Changes the volume level.
Because commercially available Roland SMF music files are also
made up of 16 Parts, you can change the settings for the
individual Parts and play them back in the same way.
Changes the amount of reverb effect applied to the sound.
Changes the amount of chorus applied.
*
First, select the song for which the settings are to be made (p. 75).
Shifts the direction from which the sound is heard between
left and right.
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 156).
Panpot
Touch
to shift the sound to the right, or touch
to
shift it to the left.
2. Touch the screen to choose the Part for which you want
to make settings.
When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, you hear what the
Change the settings for the selected Part.
song sounds like as you change the settings. When you press the
[
(Play/Stop)] button, playback of the song stops.
Display
<Solo>
<Mute>
<Clear>
Function
Only the selected Part is played back.
Toggles playback of the selected Part to on or off.
The performance data for the selected part is deleted.
5. Touch
to make settings for other parts.
The Part name appears at the upper part of the screen.
Change the settings for other parts as needed.
6. Hold down the [ (Rec)] button and press the [
(Prev)] button.
When you touch <Clear>, a message asking you to confirm the
deletion appears. To erase the recorded sound, touch <OK>. If
you don’t want to erase the recorded sound, touch <Cancel>.
Once a performance has been erased, it can’t be restored.
This operation set the changes in the settings.
If you do not want to delete a song after changing the settings for
the individual parts, save the song to a USB memory or to user
memory (p. 134).
You cannot touch <Clear> during playback of the song.
You cannot save the settings that determine whether sounds
for each individual part are played or not (solo and mute).
3. Touch <Part> to make more detailed settings for the
selected part.
The following screen appears.
If the Following Message Appears
If you try to display another screen after you’ve changed the song’s
settings for each Part, a message like the one below may appear.
Touch <OK> to change the song’s settings.
•
•
You can change the Tone for the selected Part by pressing a Tone
button while this screen is displayed. The Part name and tone name
are displayed at the top of the screen.
Touch <Cancel> to discard the changes you’re made.
When selecting Part 10 or 11, you can touch <Drum Set> to select
the drum set or effect sound.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
Selecting the Part to Record
Recording a Performance
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 156).
Step 1 Prepare for Recording
Selecting the Song to Record
2. Touch the number for the Part you want to record.
The button for the touched part being set turns orange.
You can only record drum sounds or effect sounds on Part 10 or Part
11. You can select drum sets or effect sounds by selecting Part 10 or
Part 11 and touching <Drum Set>.
1. Select “New Song” by pressing the [ (Rec)] button
while you hold down the [Song] button (p. 77).
The following screen is displayed if there is any previously recorded
performance or any song with changed settings.
Selecting the Sound to Play
3. Use the Tone buttons to choose a Tone to play.
After selecting a Tone, press the [Exit] button to call up the “16-Track
Sequencer screen.”
Recording the Performance
(Prev)] button.
(Play/Stop)] button and press the
[
If you want to overwrite while recording, select a song.
Recording will start at the beginning of the song.
If you want to record from a point other than the beginning, use the
Determining the Song’s Beat and Tempo
[
(Prev)] and [
(Next)] buttons to select another measure
to begin.
2. Press the [Metronome] button to select the beat (p. 49).
5. Press the [ (Rec)] button so its indicator is lit.
You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. If you
want to compose a song whose beat changes partway through
the song, take a look at “Changing the Beat in the Middle of a
The RM-700 is put in recording standby.
(Play/Stop)] button.
A two-bar count-in sounds, then recording starts.
3. Press the Tempo [Slow] and [Fast] buttons to set the
basic tempo of the song.
7. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Recording stops.
If you do not need the metronome sound, press the [Metronome]
button once more.
When one part is recorded, continue by selecting and recording
When using song data that has already been recorded, the
recording is made using the source song’s basic tempo. To
change the basic tempo of a song, please refer to“Changing
the Tempo of Recorded Songs” (p. 169).
You only need to follow the procedure described in “Step 1
Prepare for Recording” when you’re recording the first Part.
For the second Part and after, you can skip step 1 and proceed
from “Step 2 Start Recording.”
Step 2 Start Recording
Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the
power to the RM-700 is turned off. It is a good idea to save
song data to an external memory or user memory. For more
information, refer to “Saving Songs” (p. 134).
If necessary, choose a recording method.
For more on how to record, refer to the following paragraph.
If you record for the first time, there’s no need to select the
recording method.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
3. Touch <Composer>.
Changing the Recording Method
(Rec Mode)
The “Composer” screen appears.
You can use any of the four methods below to record with the RM-
700. Although you will normally be using “Replace Recording,”
where previously recorded material is erased when new sounds are
recorded, you’ll find that you can record songs easily by using this
method in combination with other recording methods.
Immediately after the power is turned on, Replace Recording is
selected.
Replace Recording (p. 159)
This is the normal method for recording. New material is recorded as
previously recorded material is erased.
4. Touch <Rec Mode>
to select the recording mode.
Display
Replace
Mix
Recording Method
Replace Recording
Mix Recording (p. 160)
New notes are recorded on top of notes previously recorded.
Mix Recording
This convenient feature makes it easy for you to record melodies
over prerecorded accompaniment.
Loop
Loop Recording
Punch-in recording of the interval between set
markers.
Auto Punch-In/Out
Loop Recording (p. 160)
Specified measures are recorded repeatedly, while new notes are
combined with existing music. A convenient feature for creating
rhythm parts. Loop Recording allows you to record over and over
within a selected segment, adding a different percussion sound
with each pass.
Punch-in recording starting from the point at
which the pedal or the [
pressed.
(Rec)] button is
Manual
Punch-In/Out
For more about Punch In Recording, refer to p.
161.
You can add tempo changes to a recorded
composition. Refer to p. 169.
Tempo
Punch-in Recording (p. 161)
You can re-record only a specified passage as you listen to a
recorded performance.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
Changing the Recording Method
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
The recording process where previous material is erased as new
material is recorded is called “replace recording.” This setting is in
effect when you turn on the power.
1. In the “Rec Mode,” select <Replace>.
2. Record the performance using the procedures described
in p. 125–p. 131, “Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-
Track Sequencer)” (p. 156).
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
3. Press the [ (Rec)] button.
Recorded Sounds (Mix Recording)
4. Press the track buttons that you don’t want to record, so
the indicators of those buttons are turned off.
You can record a performance layered over a previously recorded
performance. This method is called “Mix Recording.”
The button of the track that you’re recording will start blinking, and
the RM-700 will enter recording-standby mode.
1. In the “Rec Mode,” select <Mix> (p. 159).
2. Record the performance using the procedures described
in “Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons
(Redoing Recordings)” (p. 131), “Multitrack Recording
with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 156), or other
methods.
5. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to begin recording.
Recording starts from Marker A.
When the song reaches Marker B, it then returns to Marker A, where
recording continues.
Each time the recording is looped, the newest sounds are layered
over previously recorded sounds.
*
After you have finished with mix recording, return to the usual
replace recording mode.
6. When you press the [
recording stops.
(Play/Stop)] button,
Repeated Recording at the Same Location
*
You can record a specified passage over and over, layering sounds
with each pass. This method is called “Loop Recording.” This is
handy when recording a Rhythm Part.
Loop Recording Shortcut
then the hi-hat and so on, layering a different instrument onto the
same four measures. After you have finished recording the four-
measure rhythm pattern, you can then use the procedure in
“Copying Measures (Copy)” (p. 164) to create as many copies of the
four measures as you need to complete your Rhythm part.
You can also use the method described below to set Loop
Recording.
1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of
the passage you want to record.
Refer to “Setting Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker)” (p.
118).
1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the
passage you want to record.
If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then perform “Blank
Recording” for the necessary number of measures before
placing the markers.
Take a look at “Setting Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker)” (p.
118).
2. Touch the <Repeat> icon in the Marker screen (p.
If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then use “Blank Recording” to
create the necessary number of measures before placing the
markers.
118).
This sets the loop recording mode.
Start a recording.
What is Blank Recording?
*
After you have finished with loop recording, touch the
<Repeat> icon in the “Marker screen” once more to return to
the usual replace recording mode.
Blank Recording is recording a number of silent measures with no
content.
1. Set the basic tempo and beat of the song.
2. Press the [ (Rec)] button, select SMF recording,
and then press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The indicators for the [ (Rec)] and [
(Play/Stop)]
buttons both light up, then after two measures of the count
sound, recording begins.
3. Without performing anything, record only the
required number of measures, then press the
[
(Play/Stop)] button.
The indicators for the [ (Rec)] and [
(Play/Stop)]
buttons both go out, and recording stops.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
Starting Recording from the Measure Specified by
Pedals
Re-Recording Part of Your Performance
(Punch-in Recording)
Follow the procedures in “Assigning the Function of the Pedals (Left
Pedal/Center Pedal/Expression Pedal)” (p. 179), and assign <Auto
Punch In/Out> to the pedal.
You can re-record part of a passage as you listen to a recorded
performance. This recording method is called “Punch-in Recording.”
This convenient function lets you record over a specified points in a
part as you listen to a prerecorded performance in another section.
Punch-In Recording by the following two methods:
1. In the “Rec Mode,” select <Manual Punch In/Out>.
2. Begin recording.
Recording the Region Defined by Markers A and B
(Auto Punch-In/Out)
Begin recording using the procedures described in “Recording
While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing Recordings)” (p. 131) or
“Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 156).
Before you start recording, place markers A and B to define the
passage you want to re-record. Make the setting for punch-in
recording, and re-record just the passage between markers A and B.
The previously recorded performance will be played back.
Recording From the Point at Which the Pedal or Buttons
Are Pressed (Manual Punch-In/Out)
Press the pedal to which Punch In/Out is assigned (p. 179), or the
[
(Rec)] button to begin recording, then start your performance.
You can play back a performance and depress the pedal at the
Recording stops when you press the pedal, or the [ (Rec)] button
3. When you press the [
performance stops.
(Play/Stop)] button, the
Instead of pressing the pedal, you can press the [ (Rec)] button to
start and cancel recording.
*
When you’re finished with Punch-In Recording, return to the
ordinary Replace Recording mode.
Recording a Passage Specified by Markers
Following the procedures described in “Setting Markers for
Repeated Practice (Marker)” (p. 118), use Markers A and B to specify
the passage.
2. In the “Rec Mode,” select <Auto Punch In/Out> (p. 159).
3. Begin recording.
Begin recording using the procedures described in “Recording
While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing Recordings)” (p. 131) or
“Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 156).
Up until the specified passage, the previously recorded performance
plays back.
When you reach the specified passage, sounds are erased as
recording starts; begin playing now.
When you reach the end of the specified passage, recording stops,
and the RM-700 returns to playback of the previously recorded
performance.
4. When you press the [
stops.
(Play/Stop)] button, the song
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
6. Enter the chord progression and the accompaniment
pattern.
Composing an Accompaniment By
Entering Chords (Chord Sequencer)
Refer to “Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer.”
<Execute>.
You can enter a chord progression and choose the places where the
accompaniment pattern will change to create an accompaniment
for a song. This feature is called “Chord Sequencer.”
When storage of the data is complete, return to the Song Creation
screen.
Thanks to the chord sequencer, you can create an accompaniment
ahead of time and play along with your right hand.
Now, press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, and try playing the
melody along with the accompaniment you created.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Song Creation>.
Songs you’ve created are discarded as soon as you turn off the
power. If you do not want to delete the song, save it to an
external memory or to user memory. Refer to “Saving Songs”
(p. 134).
3. Touch <Chord Seq.>.
The Chord Sequencer screen appears.
Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer
This is the“cursor.” The cursor
shows where the chord change
or other information is input.
This is the end of the song.
When continuing to add input,
insert measures by touching <Ins>.
1. Use the [Value] dial to move the cursor to the input
position.
Use the [
(Prev)] and [
(Next)] buttons to move the cursor
one measure at a time.
2. Enter the chord progression and the changes in the
accompaniment pattern and arrangement.
Just as when performing with automatic accompaniment, press the
keys to specify a chord, and press a button to select the
accompaniment pattern (p. 66).
measure where the cursor is currently positioned.
This indicates the position where the accompaniment
pattern (Division) changes.
If you touch <Del>, the measure where the cursor is currently
positioned is deleted, while the measures that follow are moved
forward.
Display
<Ins>
Explanation
One measure is inserted before the measure where the
cursor is positioned.
To remove what you have input, move the cursor to the position
with input you want to delete, then touch <Clear>. This deletes the
entered setting.
The measure in which the cursor is positioned is
deleted.
<Del>
Refer to “Inputting Chords without Playing the
Keyboard” (p. 163)
•
•
You can only insert an intro at the beginning of a song. When you
add an intro, the number of bars corresponding to the length of the
intro is inserted automatically.
<Chords>
<All Clear>
<Clear>
Deletes all of the data that’s been input.
Deletes the data at the cursor position.
An ending can be inserted only at the end of the song. Once you
insert an ending, no further measures can be added.
Records the input chord progression.
Touch this icon when you have finished inputting all of
the chords.
<Execute>
4. Press a Music Style button or the touch screen to select a
Music Style (p. 59).
5. Press the [Exit] button.
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
Functions that can be accessed after they’ve been
assigned to a pedal
Editing Songs
There are many ways you can edit performances recorded using the
RM-700 Track button or 16-track sequencer.
For instructions on assigning functions, refer to “Assigning the
Function of the Pedals (Left Pedal/Center Pedal/Expression
Pedal)” (p. 179).
Basic Operation of the Editing Functions
Using the keyboard to input slash chords (such as Fm/C)
*
While songs are being loaded, the measure number in the upper
right of the screen is highlighted (text and background are
inverted). Start editing the song only after the measure number is
no longer highlighted.
Assign “Leading Bass” to a pedal.
Inputting the accompaniment only for the rhythm part
Assign “No Chord” to a pedal.
Selecting the Editing Function
Check the Accompaniment You Inserted
Here’s how to play back as much of the accompaniment as you have
input.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Song Creation>.
1. Press the [
(Prev)] button to rewind the song.
3. Touch <Song Edit>.
2. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the
The “Song Edit” screen appears.
performance is played back.
3. Playback stops when you press the [
button once more.
(Play/Stop)]
Inputting Chords without Playing the
Keyboard
You can use <Chords> at the bottom left of the Chord Sequencer
screen to specify chords on the screen.
1. Touch <Chords>.
4. Touch an editing function to select that function.
The following screen appears.
For more detailed information, refer to the corresponding page for
each function.
Function
Undo
Explanation
Page
Undoes editing operations that have been
performed.
p. 164
p. 164
p. 165
Copy
Copies measures
Evens out sounds in recorded
performances.
Quantize
Delete
Deletes measures.
p. 165
p. 166
p. 166
Insert
Inserts a blank measure.
Transposes parts individually.
2. Touch
in each to specify the chords.
Transpose
Erases data in measures, creating blank
measures.
Erase
p. 167
p. 167
p. 168
3. Touch <Execute> to enter the chord.
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.
Part Exchange
Note Edit
Exchanges the sounds in parts.
Allows corrections to be made note by
note.
Allows editing of the Tones changes that
occur during a song.
PC Edit
p. 168
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
”PC” stands for “Program Change,” which is a command that
Copying Measures (Copy)
tells an instrument to change the sound it’s using. With songs
that rely on the use of a variety of sounds, a “PC” needs to be
located at every point within the song where the Tone is to be
changed.
You can copy a portion of a performance to a different bar in the
composing a song that repeats a similar phrase.
Ex.To copy measures 5–7 to measure 8.
Some edits can’t be undone, not even by choosing “Undo.” We
recommend saving songs to external memories or to user
memory before editing. For more on how to save songs, refer
to “Saving Songs” (p. 134).
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
10
Editing
At Step 4 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 163), select <Copy>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
5. Touch the item to be edited.
6. Set the value with the [Value] dial.
To cancel the operation once it is underway, press the [Exit] button.
7. When you’re done making all the settings, touch
<Execute>.
When you are finished editing the setting, return to the “Song Edit”
screen.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen.
You can play back edited songs by pressing the [
(Play/
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be
copied
Undoing Edits (Undo)
Number of measures to be copied
You can cancel an editing operation that you’ve just carried out. This
is handy when you want to undo an edit and restore data to the way
it was before.
Copy-source Track button or part number
Choosing “All” copies all Parts. “- - -” appears in the <Dst>
column.
If you choose a Track, you can only copy to the selected Track.
You cannot copy to the other Track.
Src
Dst
There are some edits that can’t be restored.
At Step 4 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 163), select <Undo>.
Editing functions that can be undone appear on screen.
Copy-destination part number
Data can be copied in the following three ways:
Replace
If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination, this
previous recording is erased, and the copied data is written in
its place.
Mix
If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination, the
copied data is layered over the previous recording. If the Tones
used for the copy source and copy destination are different,
the copy-destination Tone is used.
Mode
Insert
If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination, the
copied portion is inserted without erasing the previous
recording. The song is lengthened by the number of inserted
measures.
If you touch <Cancel>, the undo is cancelled, and you’re returned to
the Song Edit screen.
Copy-destination measure number
When “End” is selected, the data is copied to the end of the
song.
If you touch <OK>, the confirmation message appears on screen.
Touch <OK> to undone the most recent edit.
To
Times
Number of times the data is to be copied
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
Correcting Timing Discrepancies (Quantize)
Deleting Measures (Delete)
You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded performance
by automatically aligning the music with the timing you specify.
This is called “Quantizing.”
You can delete a part of a performance by measure. When a portion
of a performance is deleted, the rest of the performance is shifted
up to fill the gap.
As an example, let’s say that the timing of some quarter-notes in a
performance is a little off. In this case, you can quantize the
performance with quarter-note timing, thus making the timing
accurate.
Erasing measures in a specified passage is called “deleting.”
Ex.To delete measures (bars) 5–8
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
Example: Quarter-note resolution
Actual note data
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Note data after quantization
At Step 4 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 163), select
<Delete>.
Example: Sixteenth-note resolution
The following screen appears.
Actual note data
1
Note data after quantization
At Step 4 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 163), select
<Quantize>.
The following screen appears.
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be
deleted
Number of measures to be deleted
Track button or part number to be deleted
When “All” is selected, the same portion of all parts is
deleted.
Tr/Pt
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the segment to
be quantized
Number of measures to be quantized
Track button or part number to be quantized
Choosing “All” quantizes the same passage in all Parts.
Tr/Pt
Quantization timing
Select one of the following values
1/2 (half note),
1/4 (quarter note),
Resolution
1/6 (quarter-note triplet),
1/8 (eighth note),
1/12 (eighth-note triplet),
1/16 (sixteenth note),
1/24 (sixteenth-note triplet),
1/32 (thirty-second note)
When finished with the Quantize settings, return to the Song Edit
screen.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
Inserting Blank Measures (Insert)
Transposing Individual Parts (Transpose)
You can add a blank measure at a location you specify. This addition
of a blank measure is called “insertion.”
You can transpose specified parts and tracks individually.
At Step 4 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 163), select
<Transpose>.
Ex.To insert measures (bars) 5–7
The following screen appears.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
10
At Step 4 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 163), select <Insert>.
The following screen appears.
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be
transposed
Number of measures to be transposed
Track button or part number to be transposed
When “All” is selected, the same portion of all parts is
transposed.
Tr/Pt
Bias
The range of transposition
Item
From
For
Content
You can select the range to transpose the data, from -24
(two octaves down) to +24 (two octaves up), adjustable in
semitones.
Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be
inserted
Number of measures to be inserted
You cannot transpose performances of the drum sets and
sound effect sets (such as the Rhythm Track).
Track button or part number where data will be inserted
When “All” is selected, blank measures are inserted at the
same place in all parts.
Tr/Pt
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Measures Blank (Erase)
Exchanging Parts (Part Exchange)
You can delete the performance data in a specified block of
measures, turning them into blank measures without reducing the
length of the song. This process is called “erasing.”
You can exchange the notes recorded for a particular part with the
notes recorded for another part. This process of exchanging parts is
called “part exchange.”
At Step 4 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 163), select
<Part Exchange>.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
The following screen appears.
Blank measures
At Step 4 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 163), select <Erase>.
The following screen appears.
Touch each
to choose Parts you want to exchange.
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be
erased
Number of measures to be erased
Track button or part number to be erased
When “All” is selected, the same portion of all parts is erased.
Tr/Pt
Select from the following types of performance data to erase:
All
All performance data, including notes, tempos, tones
switches, volume changes, etc., are erased.
Tempo
Tempo data is erased. Erasing the tempo data for all
measures results in a single, constant tempo.
Prog.Change
Erases the data for switching Tones (p. 168).
Event
Note
Erases only notes.
Except Notes
Erases all of the performance data except for the notes.
Expression
Erases Expression (volume change) information.
Lyric
Erases only lyrics.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
Correcting Notes One by One (Note Edit)
Modifying the Tone Changes in a Song
(PC Edit)
time. This process of making changes in individual notes is called
“note editing.”
the song (that is, the Tone changes in the middle of a Part). In such
songs, an instruction to switch the Tone is inserted at the place
where you want the sound to change. This instruction is called a
“Program Change” (PC), and actions such as deleting program
changes, or changing the selected Tone by them are called “PC
editing.”
You can make these corrections by using note editing:
•
•
•
•
Deleting misplayed notes
Changing the scale of a single note
Changing the force used in playing a single key (velocity)
Change the finger number
It is not possible to insert a program change into a measure or
beat that does not contain a program change.
At Step 4 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 163), select
<Note Edit>.
At Step 4 of “Selecting the Editing Function” (p. 163), select
<PC Edit>.
The following screen appears.
The following screen appears.
Location
Velocity
Finger number
Pitch
Location
Tone name
The note-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as the format.
A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a beat.
The PC-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as the format.
A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a beat.
Touch
to select the part with the note to be corrected.
Touch
to select the part with the program change to be
The Part number appears at the top of the screen.
edited.
The Part number appears at the top of the screen.
Use the [
(Prev)] and [
(Next)] buttons or use < ><
>
on the screen to find the note to be corrected.
Use the [
(Prev)] and [
(Next)] buttons or use < ><
>
When you’ve found the note you want to correct, touch “Pitch,”
“Velocity,” or “Finger Number” for the note.
on the screen to find the program change to be edited.
When you’ve found the Program Change you want to modify, touch
“Tone Name” on the screen.
Use the dial to correct the pitch, velocity, or finger number. If you
want to delete the note, touch <Delete>.
Press a Tone button to select a Tone group, then select a Tone with
the dial. When selecting Part 10 or 11, select the drum set or effect
sound.
When you’re done making all the settings, press the [Exit] button.
You will return to the “Song Edit” screen.
If you want to delete the Program Change, touch <Delete>.
When you’re done making all the settings, press the [Exit] button.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
Changing the Beat in the Middle of
a Song (Beat Map)
Changing the Tempo of Recorded
Songs
You can create songs that have beat changes during the course of
the song.
You can change the basic tempo of a composition. The basic tempo
was initially set when the song was recorded.
tempo.
You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. Before
recording the performance, determine the beat to be used.
2. Hold down the [ (Rec)] button and press the [
(Prev)] button.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Song Creation>.
The song’s basic tempo changes.
3. Touch <Beat Map>.
•
•
The change in basic tempo is discarded when you turn off the
power or choose a different song. Save important song data to
external memory or to user memory (p. 134).
The following screen appears.
If the song you’re working on has tempo changes, press the [
(Prev)] button to go back to the beginning of the song before you
carry out this operation.
Changing the Tempo Within the
Song
You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition.
The RM-700 stores song tempo information and performance data
separately. Therefore, when making changes to the tempo in a
song, you must record the changes in the tempo information
independently of the performance data.
4. Use
in the screen or the [
(Prev)] and [
(Next)] buttons to move to the measure whose beat you
want to change.
This recording of the tempo is called “Tempo Recording.”
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the screen.
Touch
Touch
to move to the beginning of the song.
to move to the end of the song.
Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a
Song
5. Touch
in each to set the beat.
You can add ritardando and other such gradual tempo changes.
6. Touch <Execute>.
Setting the Rec Mode to “Tempo”
The beat change starts with the measure you selected.
Repeat Steps 4–6 to make beat settings in other measures as
needed.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
Recording the Performance
7. Press the [Exit] button twice.
The screen displayed before you pressed the [Menu] button
appears.
8. Start a recording.
Record the performance using the procedures described in
“Recording and Saving the Performance” (p. 124). Specify the
measure, then change the beat.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Editing Songs
3. Touch <Composer>.
Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure
The “Composer” screen appears.
You can create a tempo change at the beginning of a selected
measure. This is handy when you want to make a sudden change in
tempo.
First, carry out Steps 1–4 of “Changing the Tempo Within the Song”
(p. 169) to make the “Tempo Recording” settings.
1. Access the DigiScore screen (p. 106), then use the [Value]
dial to move to the measure for which you want to
change the tempo.
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the Basic
screen.
4. Touch the <Rec Mode>
to select “Tempo.”
This makes the setting for tempo recording.
2. Press the [ (Rec)] button so its indicator is flash.
Press the [Exit] button a number of times to switch to the screen
where the measure number is indicated in the upper right of the
screen.
The RM-700 is put in recording standby.
3. Use the Tempo [Slow] [Fast] buttons or the dial to change
the tempo.
When the RM-700 goes into Tempo Recording, the tempo indication
is highlighted.
4. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The song’s tempo changes starts with the measure you selected.
Recording the Tempo
While tempo recording is being used to write tempo, the
tempo display in the screen will be highlighted.
5. Access the DigiScore screen (p. 106), and use the [Value]
dial to move to a point slightly earlier than the measure
at which you want to change the tempo.
5. When you press the [
change in tempo stops.
6. Press the [ (Rec)] button so its indicator is flash.
The RM-700 is put in recording standby.
You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording
mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the
ordinary Replace Recording.
7. When you press the [
recording begins.
(Play/Stop)] button,
If you want to restore the previous tempo, delete the tempo
data at the place where the tempo was recorded. For an
explanation of how to delete the information of tempo
settings, refer to “Making Measures Blank (Erase)” (p. 167).
8. When you get to the place where you want to change the
tempo, use the Tempo [Slow] and [Fast] buttons or the
dial to vary the tempo as desired.
9. When you press the [
recording stops.
(Play/Stop)] button,
Tempo Recording Shortcut
The song’s tempo changes.
Hold down the [ (Rec)] button and press one of the Tempo
[Slow] [Fast] buttons to switch to the Tempo Recording settings.
Record tempo information. In this case, tempo recording is
canceled when recording ends.
You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording
mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the
ordinary Replace Recording.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Countdown Sound
Changing the Settings for the
Count
Setting
Explanation
Voice (English), Voice (Japanese)
Specifies the count-down sound.
Countdown Track
Setting
Explanation
Left & Right Track,
Left Track,
Right Track,
Part 1–16
Specifies the track or part that will
determine the beginning of the
performance when adding a
countdown.
1. Press the [Count] button so its indicator is lit.
Count In Sound
The “Count” screen appears.
Setting
Explanation
Stick, Click, Electronic,
Voice (Japanese),
Voice (English), Wood Block,
Triangle & Castanets, Hand Clap,
Animal
Specifies the count-in sound.
Count In Measure
Setting
1, 2
Explanation
2. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
Specifies the length (number of
measures) of the count-in.
*
There are two setting screens. Touch
Count In Repeat
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
Setting
Explanation
3. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
When <Repeat> is turned on in the
“Marker” screen (p. 118), this
specifies whether the count-in will
sound each time the range
First Time, Each Time
between the markers is repeated,
or only the first time.
•
For more about Count Mode, refer to “Match the Tempo Before You
Begin Playing (Count In)” (p. 115).
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
The RM-700 provides a memory area in which you can store
performances you’ve recorded, as well as Music Styles you’ve copied
from external memory.
This area is called “user memory.”
The following content is stored to the user memory.
•
•
•
Songs that have been saved (p. 134)
Sets of saved User Programs (p. 150)
Music styles you’ve copied to the [User] button (p. 72)
4. Touch
to select “User.”
To delete all of the content held in the user memory and restore the
original factory settings, carry out the following procedure.
5. Touch <Execute>.
A confirmation message appears.
1. Press the [Song] button so its indicator is lit.
The Song selection screen appears.
*
If you touch <Cancel>, the deletion is cancelled.
2. Touch <File>.
6. Touch <OK>.
The “Song File Menu” screen appears.
•
•
Never turn off the power while the “Formatting...” indication is
shown.
This operation will not initialize any settings other than the contents
of user memory. If you want to return settings other than user
memory to the factory-set state, please execute Factory Reset (p.
190).
3. Touch <Format Media>.
The “Format Media” screen appears.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Selecting the Type of Slide Show (Type)
Slide Show Settings
You can specify how transitions between images are to occur when
you play back a slide show.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Slide Show>.
Setting
Simple
Explanation
The “Slide Show” screen appears.
One image will simply fade-out while the next image
fades-in.
The image will be divided into blocks that change
separately.
Block
The image will switch using rapid movement and color
combination.
Pop
Mix
Simple, block, and pop types will be combined.
Selecting the Interval at which Images will
Change (Interval)
3. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
You can specify the interval at which images will change when you
Setting
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
5 Seconds, 8 Seconds, 12 Seconds, 4 Measures, 6 Measures,
8 Measures
4. When you’re finished making settings, press the [Exit]
button.
•
Note that if you’re playing a music CD or audio/MP3 format song,
images will be switched at 12-second intervals even though you’ve
specified a setting of 4 Measures, 6 Measures, or 8 Measures.
If you play back an internal song or SMF music files, the images will
change at the number of measures you’ve specified.
•
For more about Picture category, refer to “Selecting the Type of
Image Used for the Slide Show (Picture Category)” (p. 91).
Synchronizing the Slide Show and Song
(Sync)
This setting specifies whether images will be switched in
synchronization with the song playback.
Setting
Off
Explanation
The images will not be switched in synchronization
with the song playback
Images will be switched in synchronization with the
song playback.
On
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Specifying the State of the Door of the
Player Piano (Door)
Piano Roll Screen Settings
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
You can specify the state of the door of the player piano shown in
the classic type piano roll screen.
2. Touch <Piano Roll>.
The “Piano Roll” screen appears.
Setting
Open
Explanation
The piano is shown with a completely open door.
The piano is shown with a half-open door.
The piano is shown with a closed door.
Half Open
Closed
Displaying Bar Lines and Measure Numbers
(Measure Display)
You can specify whether bar lines and measure numbers will be
shown in the classic type piano roll screen.
3. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
Setting
On
Explanation
Bar lines and measure numbers will be shown.
Bar lines and measure numbers will not be shown.
*
Settings for Piano Roll are divided into two separate screens.
Touch to switch between Classic Type and Modern type.
Off
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
Modern Type
4. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
Specifying the Direction in which the Piano
Roll Screen Moves (Viewpoint)
You can specify how the note bars will move when the modern type
piano roll screen is shown.
Classic Type
Setting
Explanation
Specifying the Color of the Piano (Cabinet)
Horizontal
The note bars will move from right to left.
The note bars will move from the foreground away to
the background.
Vertical
You can specify the cabinet color of the player piano shown in the
classic type piano roll screen.
Setting
Wood
Explanation
Selecting the Background Image
(Background)
A piano with a wood grain (brown) cabinet is shown in
the screen.
Black
A piano with a black cabinet is shown in the screen.
A piano with a white cabinet is shown in the screen.
Setting
White
None, Music Score, Lightning, Castle, Space
Selecting the Foreground Image (Frame)
Setting
None, Picture Frame, Film Roll
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Adjusting the Volume of the Backing Choir
(Backing Choir Level)
Vocal Effect Settings
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
Setting
1–10
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
Changing the Equalizer Settings
3. Touch <Vocal Effect (Mic)>.
The “Vocal Effect” screen appears.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Equalizer>.
The “Equalizer” screen appears.
4. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
*
There are two setting screens. Touch
to switch pages.
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
4. Touch a button from <1> through <4> to select an
equalizer number.
5. Touch a button from <Low> through <High> to select the
frequency band for which you want to adjust the
settings.
•
For more about Effect Sw, Effect Type, and Harmony Level, refer to
“Adding Effects to Microphone Vocals (Vocal Effect)” (p. 86).
6. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
Adding a Backing Chorus to the Harmony
(Backing Choir)
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will be reset.
This setting lets you add a backing chorus to the harmony when
you’ve selected “Duet,” “Trio,” or “Quartet.”
7. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
Setting
Off
Explanation
A backing chorus will not be added.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Gregorian, Gospel, Classical Choir, Boys choir
Selects a set of preset equalizer settings.
If you select “OFF,” the equalizer will be
turned off.
Equalizer
Number
1–4, OFF
-12–+12dB
Master Level
Low Freq.
Adjusts the overall volume of the RM-700.
Frequency point in the low-frequency range.
Generally, this changes the level at and
below this frequency.
16–16000
(Hz)
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Parameter
Low Gain
Setting
Explanation
Tuning Settings
-12–+12dB
Adjusts the level of the low-frequency range.
Changes the bandwidth of the low-
frequency range.
The bandwidth affected by the controls
narrows as the value increases.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
0.5, 1.0, 2.0,
4.0, 8.0
Low Q
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
Frequency point in the low-frequency range
to midrange.
This changes the level of the specified
bandwidth centered on this frequency.
Low Mid
Freq.
16–16000
(Hz)
3. Touch <Tuning>.
Adjusts the level of the low-frequency range
to midrange.
Low Mid Gain
Low Mid Q
-12–+12dB
The “Tuning” screen appears.
Changes the bandwidth of the low-
frequency range to midrange.
The bandwidth affected by the controls
narrows as the value increases.
0.5, 1.0, 2.0,
4.0, 8.0
Frequency point in the mid-frequency range.
This changes the level of the specified
bandwidth centered on this frequency.
16–16000
(Hz)
Mid Freq.
Mid Gain
-12–+12dB
Adjusts the level of the mid-frequency range.
Changes the bandwidth of the mid-
frequency range.
The bandwidth affected by the controls
narrows as the value increases.
0.5, 1.0, 2.0,
4.0, 8.0
Mid Q
Frequency point in the mid- to high-
frequency range to midrange.
Generally, this changes the level at and over
this frequency.
4. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
High Mid
Freq.
16–16000
(Hz)
High Mid
Gain
Adjusts the level of the mid- to high-
frequency range.
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
-12–+12dB
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
Changes the bandwidth of the mid- to high-
frequency range.
The bandwidth affected by the controls
narrows as the value increases.
0.5, 1.0, 2.0,
4.0, 8.0
5. When you’re finished making settings, press the [Exit]
button.
High Mid Q
Frequency point in the high- frequency
range.
This changes the level of the specified
bandwidth centered on this frequency.
16–16000
(Hz)
High Freq.
High Gain
High Q
•
Temperament-related settings can also be made in “Piano Designer”
(p. 29).
Adjusts the level of the high-frequency
range.
-12–+12dB
Changes the bandwidth of the high-
frequency range.
The bandwidth affected by the controls
narrows as the value increases.
0.5, 1.0, 2.0,
4.0, 8.0
Tuning to Other Instruments’ Pitches
(Master Tuning)
In situations such as when playing ensemble with other
instruments, you can tune the RM-700’s standard pitch to the pitch
of another instrument.
Sounds may become distorted as the Gain level increases.
The standard pitch generally refers to the pitch of the note that’s
played when you finger the middle A key.
•
•
Equalizer settings will be saved within the RM-700 when you carry
out the Memory Backup procedure (p. 189).
This tuning of all the instruments to a standard pitch is called
“Master Tuning.”
If you want to return the equalizer settings to their factory-set
condition, execute the Factory Reset operation (p. 190).
Setting
415.3 Hz–440.0 Hz–466.2 Hz
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Changing the Tuning (Temperament)
Setting the Tuning Curve (Stretch Tuning)
You can play classical styles such as Baroque using historic
temperaments (tuning methods).
Pianos are generally tuned so that the low range is flatter and the
high range is sharper than equal tempered pitches. This method of
tuning is unique to the piano, and is known as “stretched tuning.”
Most modern songs are composed for and played in equal
temperament, the most common tuning in use today. But at one
time, there were a wide variety of other tuning systems in existence.
A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning compared
with the changes in equal temperament pitch is called a tuning
curve.
By playing in the temperament that was in use when a composition
was created, you can experience the sonorities of chords originally
intended for that song.
Changing the tuning curve produces subtle variations in the
reverberations of the chords you play.
Setting
Equal
Explanation
This temperament divides the octave into 12
equal parts. All intervals will be slightly out of tune
by the same amount.
Stretch Tuning is valid only for the piano sound “Superior Grd.”
Setting
On
Explanation
This temperament makes the 5th and 3rd intervals
pure. It is unsuitable for playing melodies and
modulation is not possible, but it produces
beautifully harmonious chords.
Stretch tuning will be used.
Stretch tuning will not be used.
Just Major
Off
Just intonation differs between major and minor
keys. The same results as major can be obtained in
a minor key.
Just Minor
Arabic
This tuning is suitable for the music of Arabia.
This temperament is a modification of meantone
temperament and just intonation, allowing more
freedom of modulation. It allows you to play in all
keys (third method).
Kirnberger
Meantone
This temperament is a partial compromise of just
intonation in order to allow modulation.
This temperament is based on the theories of the
Greek philosopher Pythagoras, and has pure
fourths and fifths. Chords containing a third will
sound impure, but melodies will sound good.
Pythagorean
This temperament is a combination of meantone
and Pythagorean temperaments. It allows you to
play in all keys. (First method, number three.)
Werckmeister
Setting the Temperament Key
When playing with tuning other than equal temperament, you need
to specify the tonic note for tuning the song to be performed (that
is, the note that corresponds to C for a major key or to A for a minor
key).
If you choose an equal temperament, there’s no need to select a
tonic note.
Setting
C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab, A, Bb, B
*
When performing in ensemble with other instruments, be aware
that depending on the key, there may be some shifting of the pitch.
Tune the RM-700 to the fundamental pitch of the other instruments.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Adjusting the Keyboard Touch
(Key Touch)
Changing the Keyboard’s Split
Point (Split Point)
You can adjust the touch (playing feel) of the keyboard.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
This sets the point (the split point) where the keyboard is divided
when specifying chords in the left hand while using the Automatic
Accompaniment and when playing split performances (p. 39).
*
The setting is at “F#3” when the RM-700 is powered up.
F#3 (Split Point)
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Key Touch>.
B1
B6
The “Key Touch” screen appears.
Split Point settings range
The key you chose for the split point belongs to the left-hand
section of the keyboard.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Split Point>.
4. Touch one of <Fixed>–<Heavy> to specify the desired
key touch.
The “Split Point” screen appears.
To make fine adjustments, touch the slider in the screen.
Move the slider to the right to add resistance, and to the left to
make the key touch lighter.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
•
Key touch settings can also be made in “Piano Designer” (p. 29).
4. Touch one of <C3>–<F#4> to specify the split point.
The key you chose becomes the split point.
To set another key as the split point, touch
then specify the key.
in the screen,
You can set the split point within a range of B1 to B6.
5. When you’re finished making settings, press the [Exit]
button.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Function
Explanation
Assigning the Function of the Pedals
Toggles the Leading Bass function (p. 55) on or off.
The function stays on as long as the pedal to which
this is assigned is pressed.
(Left Pedal/Center Pedal/Expression Pedal)
Leading Bass
You can assign a variety of functions to the left pedal, center pedal,
and expression pedal (sold separately). You can call up the assigned
functions just by pressing the corresponding pedal.
Only the Rhythm part is played.
playing the actual keys cancels the function, and all of
the accompaniment parts are played.
No Chord
Break
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
During the performance of Automatic
Accompaniment, the accompaniment stops for one
measure only.
Fill In
A fill-in is inserted.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
Performs the same function as the [Intro/Ending]
button (p. 63). Intro and Ending are played.
Intro/Ending
Rhythm Start/
Stop
Performs the same function as the [Start/Stop] button
(p. 63).
3. Touch <Pedal>.
The “Pedal” screen appears.
Switches the Variation button. The Variation number
will increase each time you press the pedal.
Variation Up
Switches the Variation button. The Variation number
will decrease each time you press the pedal.
Variation Down
Harmony
Intelligence
Turns the Harmony Intelligence function on and off
(p. 67).
This starts Automatic Accompaniment with a fade-in
with a fade-out (where the volume gets progressively
softer), then stops.
Fade In/Out
Rotary Slow/
Fast
This switches the speed of the rotary effect (p. 37)
when you perform with an organ tone.
While the pedal is held down, the pitch of the sound
drops temporarily, returning to the original pitch
when the pedal is released.
4. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
Glide
of instruments like a Hawaiian guitar.
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
Composer Play/
Stop
Performs the same function as the [
button (p. 75).
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
The notation in the RM-700 display scrolls to the next
page when you press the pedal.
Page Fwd
Page Bwd
If a song is stopped with the score shown in the
display, the notation in the RM-700 display scrolls to
the preceding page when you press the pedal.
•
Pressing the One Touch Program [Piano] button restores the piano
performance functions to the pedals (p. 21).
During Punch-in Recording, this starts and stops
recording (p. 161).
Punch In/Out
Tap Tempo
You can set the tempo according to the interval at
which the pedal is pressed (p. 113).
Pressing the pedal during playback of a song stops
the playback.
When the pedal is released, playback resumes from
the beginning of the measure that was playing when
the pedal was pressed.
Composer
Assist
When the pedal is pressed in rapid succession, the
playback will resume backs up the same number of
measures as the number of times the pedal is pressed.
Upper
Sostenuto
The pedal functions as a sostenuto pedal (p. 21).
The pedal functions as a soft pedal (p. 21).
Upper Soft
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Function
Explanation
Using the Pedal to Apply the Bender Effect
(Bend Range)
Applies a damper pedal effect to the sounds in the
left-hand side of the keyboard during a split
performance (p. 39).
Lower Damper
The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a played note
is called the “bender effect.”
This raises the pitch of notes you play on the
keyboard.
Bend Up
You can assign the bender function to a pedal, then apply the
bender effect by depressing and releasing the pedal.
This lowers the pitch of notes you play on the
keyboard.
Bend Down
Expression
You can also make a setting that determines how much the pitch of
the note changes when you apply the bender. The maximum range
of change in pitch is called the “bend range.”
Adjusts the overall volume.
Pressing the pedal during a layer performance will
change the volume of the selected tone according to
how deeply you press the pedal.
Pressing the pedal with “EX1” selected increases the
layer Tone volume. The layer Tone is played at a fixed
volume, regardless of how forcefully the keys are
played.
Setting
EX1
1–12 (semitone steps)
Pressing the pedal with “EX2” selected increases the
layer Tone volume, while the volume of the right-
hand Tone is decreased.
The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless
of how forcefully the keys are played.
EX2
EX3
Pressing the pedal with “EX3” selected increases the
layer Tone volume.
Pressing the pedal with “EX4” selected increases the
layer Tone volume, while the volume of the right-
hand Tone is decreased.
EX4
Vocal Effect
The vocal effect will be turned on/off.
Switches the vocal effect type.
Pressing the pedal cycles you through the available
types, like this: “Duet” → “Trio” → “Quartet” → “Duet”
→ ...
Vocal Effect
Type
*
You cannot use pedal operations to select types
other than these.
Anime Control
1
When the Anime effect is on, the movement of the
graphics or text in the screen will change.
Anime Control
2
This is a variation of Anime Control 1.
Anime Control
3
When Anime effect is on, the color of the graphics or
text shown in the screen will change.
Anime control 1–3 assigned to a pedal, you can switch
the type of change by pressing a pedal that’s assigned
to Anime Ctrl Mode.
Anime Ctrl
Mode
The effect may not be applied correctly when you press a pedal
if “EX1–4” is assigned to more than one pedal.
Using the “Bend Up” or “Bend Down” function during a split
performance (p. 39) changes the pitch of sounds in the right-
hand side of the keyboard.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Changing Music Styles Without
Changing the Tone or Tempo
(Rhythm One Touch)
Selecting the Bass Tone/Chord Tone
When the Automatic Accompaniment is stopped, and Sync Start (p.
63) is turned off, chords are produced when you play in the left-
hand side of the keyboard. This is called the “chord tone,” and the
root of the chord that is played at the same time is called the “bass
tone.”
Normally, when you select a Music Style, the Tone and tempo
settings suitable for that Music Style are selected automatically.
However, you can also set it so the tempo and Tone settings don’t
change when you change Music Styles.
You can choose the Bass Tone and Chord Tone independently.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Rhythm Configuration>.
The “Rhythm Configuration” screen appears.
3. Touch <Rhythm One Touch>.
The “Rhythm One Touch” screen appears.
4. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
4. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
Setting
Explanation
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
The suitable tone for a Music Style is selected
automatically.
Suitable Tone
The suitable tempo for a Music Style is selected
automatically.
Suitable Tempo
Other Setting
Other settings (Part Balance, etc.) are changed
automatically.
•
For more about Chord Recognition Mode, refer to “Playing Chords
with Simple Fingering (Chord Intelligence)” (p. 56).
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
Bass Tone
Setting
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
Off (no tone is played), Acoustic Bs., A. Bass+Cymbl, Fingered Bs.,
Picked Bass, Fretless Bs., Slap Bass1, Organ Bass, Synth Bass 101,
Thum Voice
Chord Tone
Setting
Off (no tone is played), E.Piano 1, E. Piano 2, Soft E. Piano, Hard E.
Piano, Slow Strings, Strings, Choir, Doos Voice
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Using the [Accomp] Button to Switch the
Part to be Muted (Accomp Track)
Composer Settings
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
Here’s how to switch the part that will be muted when you press the
[Accomp] track button and turn off its light.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
Setting
Explanation
Accomp &
Rhythm
Both the accompaniment and rhythm will be muted.
3. Touch <Composer>.
Only the accompaniment will be muted.
(The rhythm will not be muted.)
Accomp
Rhythm
The “Composer” screen appears.
Only the rhythm will be muted.
(The accompaniment will not be muted.)
This setting will be applied when you select a song after
changing this setting.
Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track
Buttons During SMF Playback (Track Assign)
Normally, when playing back Roland Piano Digital-compatible SMFs
upper part is assigned to the [Right] button. However, assignment
4. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
If you cannot get the upper and lower parts to work well set on
“Auto,” then change the setting to “2/1 Part” or “3/4 Part.”
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
This setting is valid only with respect to SMF format songs that
reside in external storage (USB memory or CD-ROM).
Setting
Auto
Explanation
•
•
For more about Rec Mode, refer to “Changing the Recording
Method (Rec Mode)” (p. 159).
The part assigned to each track will be determined
automatically, depending on the song data.
For more about Rec Stop, refer to “Changing How Recording Stops”
(p. 132).
Part 1 will be assigned to the upper part track and part
2 to the lower part track
2/1 Part
3/4 Part
Part 4 will be assigned to the upper part track and part
3 to the lower part track.
Hiding the Lyrics and Playing Hints
Some karaoke music data or internal songs contain lyrics or playing
hints. When such song data is played back, the lyrics and playing
hints will be displayed in the slide show screen.
This setting will be applied when you select a song after
changing this setting.
Setting
On
Explanation
When you play back song data that contains lyrics or playing
hints and are viewing a slide show screen, the lyrics and
playing hints will be displayed automatically.
Lyrics and playing hints will not be displayed even if you are
playing song data that contains lyrics or playing hints with
the slide show screen displayed.
Off
Lyrics are also displayed in the piano roll screen.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Synchronizing the Timing of the Piano and
Accompaniment (CD/Audio Sync)
CD/Roland Audio Port Settings
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
With certain CDs designed to be used with the player function, the
timing of the piano and accompaniment sounds may not be
synchronized. However, you can synchronize the piano and
accompaniment.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
Setting
0–100
Explanation
3. Touch <CD/Roland Audio Port>.
The piano sound is delayed more as the value is
increased.
The “CD/Roland Audio Port” screen appears.
Specifying the Type of Signal at the Roland
Audio Port (Audio Port Mode)
When you’ve connected a CD player to the Roland Audio Port and
are playing back a CD, use this setting to specify the type of CD.
Setting
Auto
Explanation
The CD type is detected automatically.
General CDs for Player Piano contain audio and MIDI
data, and the data format may vary from one CD to the
next. If the CD’s data format does not match the RM-
700’s settings, a “beep” will sound. Certain general
Automatic Piano CDs may not be playable on the RM-
700.
4. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
Type A
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
Type B
Stereo
Commercial Music CD (CDs other than those designed
for use with the player piano)
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
Synchronizing the Timing of the Signals
from the Piano and the Roland Audio Port
(Audio Port Sync)
Setting the Type of CD to be Played Back
(CD/Audio Type)
The RM-700 may be unable to correctly recognize the type of CD
being used. In such instances, you can specify the type of CD
manually.
When you’ve connected a CD player to the Roland Audio port and
are playing back a CD, use this setting to synchronize the timing of
the piano sound and the CD sound.
Setting
Auto
Explanation
Setting
0–100
Explanation
The CD type is detected automatically.
The piano sound is delayed more as the value is
increased.
General CDs for Player Piano contain audio and MIDI
data, and the data format may vary from one CD to the
next. If the CD’s data format does not match the RM-
700’s settings, a “beep” will sound. Certain general
Automatic Piano CDs may not be playable on the RM-
700.
Type A
Type B
Stereo
Commercial Music CD (CDs other than those designed
for use with the player piano)
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Switching the Remote Sensor On
and Off (Ir Function)
Remote Control Settings
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
You set the Remote Sensor to On (active) or Off (disabled).
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Remote Control>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
The “Remote Control” screen appears.
3. Touch <Ir Function>.
The “Ir Function” screen appears.
4. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
4. Touch
to switch On and Off.
Setting
On
Explanation
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
Remote control function is enabled.
Remote control function is disabled.
Remote control cannot be used,
Off
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
Changing the [Play/Stop] Button Functions
(Play Mode)
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
Here you can select the function that is assigned to the remote’s
[
(Play/Stop)] button.
Display
One Song
Explanation
Only the selected song is played back. Playback stops
when the song is finished.
Songs are played back continuously in sequence, starting
from the currently selected song.
Internal Song
Songs in the selected genre are played back continuously.
“Favorites” Songs
All Song
Songs registered to the “Favorites” are played back in
sequence.
Songs on USB Memory and CD
Songs within the selected folder are played back
continuously.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Display
Explanation
Changing the [TEMPO] Button and the
The songs are played back in random order.
[TRANSPOSE] Button Functions
(TEMPO/TRANSPOSE)
Internal Song
The songs in all genres are played back in random order.
“Favorites” Songs
Random
Songs registered to the “Favorites” are played back in
random order.
Here you can select the functions that are assigned to the remote’s
TEMPO [-] [+] buttons and TRANSPOSE [-] [+] buttons.
Songs on USB Memory and CD
Songs within the selected folder are played back in
random order.
Display
Tempo
Explanation
Changes the tempo.
Pressing [-] button slows the tempo down; pressing [+]
button speeds up the tempo.
Changing the [FUNC1] [FUNC2] Button
Functions
Scrolls the notation in the external display.
Press [-] button to return to the previous page; press
[+] button to advance to the next page.
Notation
Transpose
Bwd/Fwd
Here you can select the functions that are assigned to the remote’s
[FUNC1] button and [FUNC2] button.
Transposes the song.
Pressing [-] button lowers the pitch in semitone steps;
pressing [+] button raises the pitch in semitone steps.
Setting
Panel
Explanation
Fast forwards and rewinds the song.
When [-] button is pressed, the song rewinds; when [+]
button is pressed, the song is fast forwarded.
Switches on/off the function that provides for
mirroring of the RM-700’s display screen on a
connected television or display.
Adjust the volume of a music CD or an audio-format
song.
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2] button is pressed,
the [Accomp] track is switched on or off.
When turned off, the sound from the lower track does
not play.
Pressing [-] will reduce the volume, and pressing [+]
will increase the volume.
Accomp Track
Left Track
Audio Volume
*
This will not affect the audio input from the Roland
Audio Port.
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2] button is pressed,
the [Left] track is switched on or off.
When turned off, the sound from the lower track does
not play.
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2] button is pressed,
the [Right] track is switched on or off.
When turned off, the sound from the upper track does
not play.
Right Track
Switches on/off the Center Cancel function for music
CDs or audio/MP3 format songs.
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2] button is pressed,
switches display of Lyrics/Playing Hints on (displayed)
or off (hidden) (p. 182).
Lyrics
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2] button is pressed,
switches the vocal effect on/off.
Vocal Effect
Each time the [FUNC 1] or [FUNC 2] button is pressed,
switches the Anime effect on/off.
Anime
DigiScore Size
Switches the size of the notation.
Pressing the button while the song is playing back
stops the playback. When you release the button,
playback resumes from the beginning of the measure
being played when you pressed the button.
Pressing the button a number of times in rapid
succession moves the playback position back by the
same the number of measures, after which playback
resumes.
Replay
Repeat
Playback repeats within the marked range.
Ejects the CD from the CD drive.
CD Eject
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Changing the Communication Settings for
USB Memory (Ext. Memory Mode)
USB Settings
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
In some cases, when USB memory is connected to the External
Memory connector, it may take longer for data to be loaded, or data
may fail to be loaded successfully.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
If this happens, changing the communication settings for the USB
memory may help.
*
Changing the settings is normally not required.
3. Touch <USB>.
The “USB” screen appears.
Setting
Mode 1, Mode 2
Changing the Communication Settings for
External Drive (Ext. Drive Mode)
In some cases, when CD drive is connected to the Ext Drive
connector, it may take longer for data to be loaded, or data may fail
to be loaded successfully.
If this happens, changing the communication settings for the CD
drive may help.
4. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
*
Changing the settings is normally not required.
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
Setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
Mode 1, Mode 2
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
Changing the USB Driver Settings
(USB Driver)
Normally, you don’t need to install a driver in order to connect the
RM-700 to your computer via the USB connector.
However, if some problem occurs, or if the performance is poor,
using the original Roland driver may solve the problem.
If you do so, make the following setting to specify the USB driver
you intend to use before you install the driver.
Setting
Generic
Explanation
Choose this if you want to use the standard USB driver
that was included with your computer.
Normally, you should use this mode.
Choose this if you want to use a USB driver
downloaded from the Roland website.
Original
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Disabling the Background Music in the
Evaluation Screen (Instruction Mode)
Demo Settings
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
Here you can specify whether background music will play in the
Visual Lesson evaluation screen.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
3. Touch <Auto Demo>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
The “Auto Demo” screen appears.
3. Touch <Instruction Mode>.
The “Instruction Mode” screen appears.
4. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
4. Touch
to change the setting.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
Setting
Basic
Explanation
Background music will be played
Background music will not be played.
Expert
Automatically Starting the Demo (Auto Start)
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
You can set the instrument so that the Demo starts automatically
with no operation required.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
Setting
On
Explanation
The demo will begin automatically if no operation is
performed for five minutes.
Off
The demo will not begin automatically.
Adding Background Music to the Auto Demo
(BGM)
Here you can specify whether background music (BGM) will be
added when the auto demo starts.
Setting
On
Explanation
Background music will be added.
Background music will not be added.
Off
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Volume Settings
Calibrating the Touch Screen
(Touch Screen)
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
The point detected by the touch screen may drift as you use the RM-
700 for an extended time. If you notice such a drift, you can correct it
by calibrating the touch screen as follows.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
3. Touch <Gain>.
The “Gain” screen appears.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Touch Screen>.
The “Touch Screen” screen appears.
4. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
*
If you touch <Factory Reset> in the above screen, the touch screen
calibration settings revert to the original factory settings.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
4. Touch <Execute>.
Adjusting the Volume (Master Gain)
If you are playing the RM-700 through a connected external system,
there may be cases in which the volume from your external system
is too low even when the RM-700’s [Volume] knob is turned to the
maximum setting. In such cases, you can adjust the master gain
setting as follows. Adjusting the master gain will also affect the
volume of the internal speakers and headphones.
The sound may distort if you increase the volume excessively.
Setting
5. A point will be indicated. Touch this point.
-12–12 dB
If you touch a point other than the indicated one, the drift may
become extremely severe. Be sure to touch the correct point.
Adjusting the Audio Recording Level
(Audio Rec Gain)
This adjusts the recording level for audio recording.
Setting
-24–6 dB
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
When you’ve finished calibrating the position, the following screen
appears.
Remembering the Settings Even
(Memory Backup)
Normally, the various settings revert to their default values when
the power is turned off. However, you can specify that the settings
will be remembered even when the power is turned off.
This function is called “Memory Backup.”
For more on the settings stored using Memory Backup, refer to
“Parameters Stored in Memory Backup” (p. 225).
6. Touch <Write>.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
The settings will be written, and you will return to the Menu screen
for settings.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
If you turn off the power without writing the settings, the
calibration settings will be cancelled.
3. Touch <Memory Backup>.
The “Memory Backup” screen appears.
Changing the Language (Language)
Five choices are available for the language used in displaying
information on the screen.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Language>.
The “Language” screen appears.
4. Touch <Execute>.
The confirmation message appears on screen.
4. Touch
to select the language.
*
If you decide to cancel the memory backup, touch <Cancel>.
Setting
5. Touch <OK>.
English, French, German, Japanese, Spanish
The settings will be stored, and you will return to the Settings Menu
screen.
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
•
Never turn off the power while the “Executing...” indication is
shown.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
5. Touch <OK>.
Restoring the Factory Settings
(Factory Reset)
The factory reset will be executed.
When the Factory Reset has been completed, The following screen
appears.
You can return the content stored with “Memory Backup” to their
Reset.”
When you perform a Factory Reset, all settings that have been
factory defaults.
This operation does not return the touch screen calibration
settings to the original factory condition. To return the touch
screen calibration settings to the original factory settings, refer
to “Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch Screen)” (p. 188)
6. Turn the RM-700’s power off, then on again.
When you want to restore the content registered to the RM-
700’s User memory to the factory condition, refer to
“Formatting the User Memory” (p. 172).
•
Never turn off the power while the “Executing...” indication is
shown.
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <Factory Reset>.
The following screen appears.
4. Touch <Execute>.
The confirmation message appears on screen.
*
If you decide to cancel the factory reset, touch <Cancel>.
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various Settings
Disabling the Buttons (Panel Lock)
Once set to “Panel Lock,” all buttons on the RM-700 will no longer be
operable.
This prevents the settings from being inadvertently modified even if
children press the buttons accidentally.
Once Panel Lock has been turned on, nothing will be shown in
the screen, and the indicators of all buttons will be turned off.
Method 1
1. While holding down the One Touch Program [Piano]
button, press the [Power] switch to turn the power on.
All buttons except for piano play are disabled.
Turn the [Volume] knob to Adjust the volume.
Method 2
1. While holding down the [Transpose] button, press the
[V-LINK] button.
All buttons will become inoperable; you’ll only be able to play the
sound that you selected before Panel Lock was activated.
Turn the [Volume] knob to Adjust the volume.
Cancelling the Setting
1. Hold down the [Transpose] button and press the [V-LINK]
button.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting External Devices
You can connect the RM-700 to external devices such as audio
equipment, MIDI instruments and computer.
Television
Connecting an External Display or Television
Your slide shows, animation effects, and the viewing of lyrics or
scores can all benefit from the use of a larger display.
That’s why this instrument allows you to connect an external
computer-use monitor or a television.
scores can all benefit from the use of a larger display.
That’s why this instrument allows you to connect an external
computer-use monitor or a television.
You can switch screens with the remote control. For details,
refer to “Using the Remote Control” (p. 83).
Connecting Portable Audio Player (p. 195)
You can’t use the Video Output jack and Analog RGB Out
connector at the same time.
Port and play its sound from the RM-700. You can also use the
Transpose function (p. 122) to shift the pitch, or use the Center
Cancel function (p. 85) to minimize the melody or vocal sound.
Connecting an External Display
Connecting Video Equipment (p. 196)
With a V-LINK compatible device connected, you can switch images
with the keyboard.
Connecting MIDI Devices (p. 196)
External display
Monitor cable
(Commercially available)
You can connect a MIDI sequencer and record performance data
sequencer. Also, when you connect a MIDI sound module, you can
perform on the RM-700 and hear the sounds played through the
MIDI sound module.
Types of display that can be connected
In general, you can connect any display that is sold as a “multiscan
monitor.” However, to be certain, please check the following
specifications before you connect your display.
Connecting Audio Equipment (p. 199)
The RM-700 has high-quality built-in stereo speakers, but you can
also hook it up a stereo system for an even more impressive sound.
Resolution
800 x 480 pixels or more
Horizontal scan rate
Vertical scan rate
Connector
31.5 kHz
Connecting a Computer (p. 200)
Three-row 15-pin D-sub type
Analog
You can use a sequencer program to record performance data from
the RM-700 and play performance data from the program on the
RM-700.
Signal
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
Connecting an Expression Pedal
You can connect an expression pedal and use it to adjust the
volume or to control another function.
1. Switch off the RM-700 and the display you’ll be
connecting (p. 21).
Connect the expression pedal to the RM-700’s rear bottom panel
Control Pedal connector.
2. Use a commercially available monitor cable to connect
the RM-700’s Analog RGB Out connector to the analog
RGB connector of your display.
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold
separately). By connecting any other expression pedals, you
risk causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
3. Switch on the RM-700 (p. 21).
4. Switch on the connected display.
For details on how to use your external display, refer to the
owner’s manual for your display.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting External Devices
5. Set to “RGB” at “Selecting the Video Output Destination
(Output Select)” (p. 195).
Connecting a Television
Installation of Display
Video cable
(Commercially available)
You can also remove the music rest, then place the display there so
that it faces forward. For instructions on removing the music rest,
refer to “Removing the Music Rest” (p. 20).
Television
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
on all devices before making any connections.
1. Switch off the RM-700 and the television you’ll be
connecting (p. 21).
2. Connect the RM-700 to your television, use a video cable
(commercially available) to connect the RM-700’s Video
When using the RM-700 with a display placed on it, be sure to note
the following precautions.
•
•
Make sure the display sits stably on the RM-700 before use.
3. Switch on the RM-700 (p. 21).
4. Switch on your television.
Do not let the base of the display rest on any of the music rest’s
moving parts. Keep the base of the display within one of the areas
shown by the dotted lines in the illustration below.
Areas for placing the display
5. Set to “Video” at “Selecting the Video Output
Destination (Output Select)” (p. 195).
6. (As necessary) Specify the television output format (p.
194).
7. Specify the aspect ratio (ratio between width and height)
for your television (p. 194).
•
If you are placing the display on top of the RM-700, we recommend
using a liquid crystal display (LCD). If using a cathode ray tube (CRT)
display, take extra care to ensure that the display rests stably on the
instrument.
•
There are small areas at the left and right of the screen that do not
show an image; this is due to the design of the RM-700.
Television
You must turn off the power of the external display or television in
the following order.
1. Minimize the volume of the RM-700 (p. 22).
2. Switch off the connected display or television.
3. Switch off the RM-700 (p. 21).
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting External Devices
Selecting the Aspect Ratio of the Video
Output (Video Output Aspect Ratio)
Video Settings
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
This setting changes the proportional relationship between the
vertical and horizontal dimensions of the image that is output from
the RM-700 to the television or display connected to the Output
jack.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
The RM-700’s display screen has a horizontal/vertical ratio of 16:9.
Televisions and displays have screen sizes with a horizontal/vertical
ratio of 4:3 or 16:9 (wide screen).
3. Touch <Video>.
The “Video” screen appears.
You can’t change the aspect ratio of the image that is output
from the Analog RGB Output connector to an external display
or a television.
Setting
16:9
Explanation
Use this setting if the connected television or display
has a screen aspect ratio of 16:9.
Use this setting if the connected television or display
has a screen aspect ratio of 4:3.
4:3
Image is displayed correctly
4. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
Aspect Ratio
4: 3
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
4: 3 Television
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
Original image
16: 9
Specifying the Television Format
(Video Type)
16: 9 Television
Image is distorted
Image is
not completely visible
Set the RM-700s television format to match the television format of
the television that is connected.
Change this setting if the image is not correctly shown on the
television.
Set this to the broadcast format used in your area.
Setting
NTSC
PAL
Explanation
NTSC is used in North America and a number of other
countries including Japan.
•
If the image is still not shown correctly even though you have
adjusted the RM-700’s aspect ratio to match the television or display
you’ve connected, please change the settings of the connected
television or display.
PAL is used in many regions, including Europe and Asia.
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting External Devices
Selecting the Video Output Destination
(Output Select)
Connecting a Portable Audio Player
You can connect a portable audio player to the Roland Audio Port,
and the music is heard from the RM-700’s speakers.
Here’s how to choose whether the image will be shown on a
television connected to the Video Out jack or an external display
connected to the Analog RGB Out connector.
1. Turn the front right bottom panel Roland Audio Port
volume knob all the way toward the left to minimize the
volume.
Setting
RGB
Explanation
Analog RGB Out connector
Video Out jack
2. Connect your portable audio player to the front right
bottom panel Roland Audio Port.
Video
If both an external display and a television are connected
simultaneously, the image will appear incorrectly on both the
external display and the television.
Selecting the Screen that is Shown when
Slide Show, DigiScore, or Piano Roll are off
(Video Out Mode)
Portable audio player
Here you can specify what will be shown on the external display,
television when the Slide Show, DigiScore, and Piano Roll are off.
R
L
Setting
Panel
Explanation
The RM-700’s display will show the same image as the
television or display that is connected to the RM-700.
Red
White
ROLAND
Black
“Roland” will be displayed.
Nothing will be displayed.
3. In the song selection screen, choose “New Song (p. 77).”
the volume with the Roland Audio Port [Volume] knob.
5. If you want to decrease the vocal portion of the music
from the portable audio player, press the [Center Cancel]
button so its indicator is lit.
•
You can change the pitch of the portable audio player. For details,
refer to “Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back
(Transpose)” (p. 122).
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting External Devices
Connecting Video Equipment
(V-LINK)
Connecting MIDI Equipment
Performance data can be exchanged between the RM-700 and
external MIDI equipment, allowing them to control each other. For
example, you can play one device from the keyboard of another
device, or switch sounds remotely.
Connecting the RM-700 to a V-LINK compatible image device allows
you to control the images with the RM-700.
V-LINK
What’s MIDI?
V-LINK (
) is a function that allows music and
“MIDI” stands for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface.” It is a
universal standard that allows performance data to be
exchanged among electronic musical instruments and
computers.
images to be performed together. By using MIDI to connect
two or more V-LINK compatible devices, you can easily enjoy a
wide range of visual effects that are linked to the expressive
elements of a music performance.
The RM-700 provides MIDI connectors so that performance
data can be transferred between it and other devices. By using
these connectors to connect other devices with the RM-700,
you can take advantage of a wide range of possibilities.
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
Connection Examples:
Using a MIDI Sequencer to Play the RM-700
MIDI OUT
USB MIDI interface
V-LINK compatible image device
Roland MT series
1. Press the [V-LINK] button to switch the V-LINK On/Off.
Out MIDI
In
Button
Lit
Explanation
The V-LINK function is switched on.
You can control images using the twelve keys at the left
end of the keyboard.
MIDI cable
Unlit
The V-LINK function is switched off.
*
•
This is set to “Off” (unlit) when you turn on the power.
•
When the RM-700 is connected to a MIDI sequencer, set it to “Local
Off.” Refer to “Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and
Keyboard (Local Control)” (p. 198).
While V-LINK is switched on, no sound is produced when you press
any of the twelve keys at the left end of the keyboard.
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting External Devices
Playing a MIDI Sound Module from the RM-
700
MIDI Settings
1. Press the [Menu] button so its indicator is lit.
2. Touch <Settings>.
*
The Menu screen for Settings contains five screen pages.
Touch to switch between the pages.
3. Touch <MIDI> or <Program Change>.
The following screen appears.
MIDI sound module
MIDI cable
MIDI IN
Making Connections
1. Minimize the volume of the RM-700 and of the MIDI
equipment you are connecting.
2. Switch off power to the RM-700 and the MIDI equipment
you are connecting.
4. To change the setting, touch
want to specify.
for the item you
3. Use MIDI cables (commercially available) to connect the
MIDI connectors to the connectors of the other
equipment (refer to the figure).
If you touch <Reset>, the currently selected setting
(parameter) will return to its factory setting.
4. Switch on power to the RM-700 and the connected MIDI
equipment.
5. Press the [Exit] button when you’ve finished making
settings.
5. Adjust the volume of the RM-700 and the connected MIDI
equipment.
Changing the MIDI Transmit Channel
(Tx Channel)
6. If necessary, make MIDI settings.
This setting specifies the MIDI channel on which the RM-700 will
transmit. MIDI uses sixteen “MIDI channels,” which are numbered 1
through 16. By connecting MIDI devices and specifying the
appropriate MIDI channel for each device, you can play or select
sounds on those devices.
The RM-700 will receive all sixteen channels (1–16).
Setting
1–16
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting External Devices
Disconnecting the Internal Sound
Generator and Keyboard (Local Control)
Sending Recorded Performance Data to a
MIDI Device (Composer MIDI Out)
When you have a MIDI sequencer connected, set this parameter to
Local Off. Most conventional sequencers have the Thru function set
to On, so as seen in the figure, when information describing what
has been played on the keyboard (1) arrives at the sound generator
via two separate routes (2), notes could be sounded twice or
sometimes get cut off. To prevent this, the setting called “Local Off”
is used to disconnect the route in (1).
When Composer MIDI Out is active, you can send performance data
recorded with the RM-700 to a connected MIDI device or computer.
Setting
On, Off
Explanation
When you turn on the power, this is set to “OFF” (data
is not sent).
(1) Local On
Sending Tone Change Messages (Bank Select
MSB/Bank Select LSB/Program Change)
Sequencer
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
Sound
generator
Memory
A Program Change is a message that means “change to the Tone of
the specified number.” The device that receives this changes to the
Tone of the corresponding number.
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
When you choose a Program Change message (Program Number),
the Program Number will be transmitted to the MIDI device
connected to the RM-700. The MIDI device that receives the
Program Number changes the tone to the corresponding Program
Number.
Soft Thru On
(2)
Each note played is
sounded twice
Local On:
Normally, the Tone is selected from the 128 Tones available. Some
MIDI devices, however, have more than 128 Tones. With such
devices, the Tone is selected through a combination of Program
Change messages and Bank Select messages. There are two parts of
a Bank Select message: the MSB (Controller 0, with a value of 0–127)
and the LSB (Controller 32, with a value of 0–127).
The keyboard and the internal sound generator are in a linked state.
Local Off:
The keyboard and the internal sound generator are in an unlinked
state. No sound will be produced by the keyboard when it is played.
Sound is emitted
No sound produced
Bank Select MSB/Bank Select LSB
Setting
Sound Generator
Sound Generator
Local On
Local Off
0 (00H)–127 (7FH)
Program Change
Setting
When a Roland MT series instrument is connected, it is not
necessary to make the Local Off setting. The MT transmits a
Local Off message when the power is turned on. If you turn on
the power in the order of the RM-700 → MT series, Local Off will
be set automatically.
1 (00H)–128 (7FH)
Some MIDI instruments can’t handle Bank Select messages.
Others can handle Bank Selects, but do not recognize the LSB
part.
Setting
Explanation
The Local Control is set to On.
The keyboard and internal sound generator are
connected.
On
Off
The Local Control is set to Off.
The keyboard and internal sound generator are
disconnected. Playing the keyboard will not produce
sound.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting External Devices
Turning the Power Off
Connecting Audio Equipment
1. Minimize the volume of the RM-700 and of the connected
speakers.
By connecting the RM-700 to your audio equipment or external
speakers, you can play the RM-700’s sounds from your stereo
system’s speakers or from other external speakers, or record your
performance on a recording device.
2. Switch off power to your speakers.
3. Switch off power to the RM-700.
•
•
If you use a connection cable that has a built-in resistor, the volume
of the device connected to the input jack may be low. Please use
connection cables that do not contain a resistor.
Playing the Sound of an Audio Device
through the RM-700
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all
devices before making any connections.
Playing the RM-700 through Connected
Speakers
Audio cable
OUTPUT
(LINE OUT)
Speaker etc.
INPUT (LINE IN)
Stereo System
1. Minimize the volume of the RM-700 and of the audio
device you are connecting.
Audio cable
2. Switch off power to the RM-700 and the audio device you
are connecting.
1. Minimize the volume of the RM-700 and of the speakers
you are connecting.
3. Make connections using commercially available audio
cables.
2. Switch off power to the RM-700 and the speakers you are
connecting.
4. Switch on power to the audio device.
5. Switch on the RM-700’s power.
3. Make connections using separately available audio
cables.
6. Adjust the volume of the RM-700 and the connected
audio device.
4. Switch on the RM-700’s power.
Turning the Power Off
5. Switch on power to the connected speakers.
1. Minimize the volume of the RM-700 and of the connected
audio device.
6. Adjust the volume of the RM-700 and the connected
speakers.
2. Switch off power to the RM-700.
Play the RM-700’s keyboard, and sound will be produced from the
connected speakers (or stereo set).
3. Switch off power to the connected audio device.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting External Devices
If connection to your computer is unsuccessful...
Connecting Your Computer
RM-700 to your computer. However, if some problem occurs, or if
the performance is poor, using the Roland original driver may solve
the problem.
If you use a USB cable (commercially available) to connect the USB
connector to the USB connector of your computer, you’ll be able to
do the following things.
For details on downloading and installing the Roland original driver,
refer to the Roland website.
•
•
Use the RM-700 to play SMF music files played back by MIDI-
compatible software.
Roland website: http://www.roland.com/
By transferring MIDI data between the RM-700 and your sequencer
software, you’ll be able to enjoy a wide range of possibilities for
music production and editing.
Specify the USB driver you want to use, and then install the driver.
For details, refer to “Changing the USB Driver Settings (USB Driver)”
(p. 186).
Connect the RM-700 to your computer as shown below.
USB
connector
USB cable
Computer
•
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all
devices before making any connections.
•
•
•
Only MIDI data can be transmitted and received via USB. Data for a
song recorded on the RM-700 cannot be transmitted or received.
A USB cable is not included. If you need to obtain one, ask the dealer
where you purchased the RM-700.
Switch on power to the RM-700 before you start up the MIDI
application on your computer. Don’t turn the RM-700’s power on/
off while your MIDI application is running.
Refer to the Roland website for system requirements.
Roland website: http://www.roland.com/
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Troubleshooting
If you think there’s a problem, read this first.
Case
Cause/Remedy
Is the power cord connected and plugged in correctly? (p. 19)
The power doesn’t come on
Is the panel locked? (p. 191)
Cancel the Panel Lock function.
Turn the power off, then back on.
The button doesn’t work
The RM-700 uses a liquid-crystal screen, so text may not be displayed when the ambient temperature is below
freezing.
Is the panel locked? (p. 191)
Nothing appears on screen
Cancel the Panel Lock function.
Could the [Anime] button be on? (p. 94)
Press the [Exit] button or press the [Anime] button to turn off the Anime effect.
The positioning of the touch screen may become displaced if some time has passed since it was last used. Take a look
at “Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch Screen)” (p. 188) to correct the positioning.
The touch screen doesn’t respond correctly
Is the pedal connected correctly? (p. 19)
Depressing a pedal has no effect, or the
pedal effect doesn’t stop
Has a different function been assigned to the pedal?
See “Assigning the Function of the Pedals (Left Pedal/Center Pedal/Expression Pedal)” (p. 179).
Normal pedal operation is automatically enabled when the One Touch Program [Piano] button is pressed (p. 28).
Adjust the adjuster underneath the pedal so that the pedal presses firmly against the floor surface (p. 22).
The pedal rattles
The volume level of the instrument
connected to Input jacks or Roland Audio
Port is too low
Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor?
Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.
Are you using (optional) Roland memory?
Reliable performance cannot be guaranteed if you use non-Roland memory products.
Unable to read from/write to USB memory
Try switching the Ext Memory Mode (p. 186).
No data from the remote control is received when the Remote Sensor is switched off.
Check “Switching the Remote Sensor On and Off (Ir Function)” (p. 184).
Remote Control not functioning
Performance begins unexpectedly
No sound is heard
Could the Auto Start setting for Auto Demo be set to “On”? (p. 187)
If Auto Start is On, the demo will begin if no operation has been performed for five minutes.
Is the volume level of the RM-700 (p. 22) or connected device turned all the way down?
Are headphones plugged in? (p. 22)
Has a plug remained connected to the Phones jack?
When headphones or plugs are connected, the keyboard’s speaker stops playing.
Has the [Balance] knob been moved all the way to the right or left? (p. 70)
Has the volume been set to “0” using the Part Balance? (p. 70)
In the equalizer screen, could Master Level or Gain be set to the minimum? (p. 175)
Has the footage been adjusted so that all frequency components aren’t sounded? (p. 37)
Is the speaker cable connected and plugged in correctly? (p. 19)
No sound is heard
Could the remote VOLUME [-] [+] buttons or the [MUTE] button be pressed to set the volume to “0”? (p. 84)
Even if the [VOLUME] knob is raised, there will be no sound if the remote VOLUME [-] [+] buttons or the [MUTE] button
have been pressed to set the volume to “0.”
Could a pedal be connected to the Control Pedal jack? (p. 192)
If the connected pedal is assigned to the “Expression” function (p. 179), there will be no sound unless you depress the
pedal.
The same holds true when Expression has been assigned to the Left Pedal or Center Pedal.
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Case
Cause/Remedy
Could the Twin Piano mode be set to “Individual”? (p. 105)
If Twin Piano is turned “On” and the mode setting is “Individual,” and headphones are connected, sound will not be
heard from the right-hand Phones jack when you play the left-hand side of the keyboard. Similarly, sound will not be
heard from the left-hand Phones jack when you play the right-hand side of the keyboard.
No sound is heard
No sound from the left side is V-LINK switched on? (p. 196)
When V-LINK is switched on, the twelve keys at the left end of the keyboard are used to control images, and no sounds
are played with these keys.
Is the portable audio player connected correctly? (p. 195)
The volume of the portable audio player
connected to the Roland Audio Port is too
low, or it cannot be heard at all
Could the Roland Audio Port Volume knob be turned to the minimum position? (p. 195)
The portable audio player’s volume is adjusted with the Roland Audio Port Volume knob; not by the [Volume] knob.
Is the Roland Audio Port Mode set correctly? (p. 183)
Can’t play a CD in the CD player connected
to the Roland Audio Port
Set the type appropriately for the CD that you want to play.
Have all devices been switched on?
No sound is heard
Does the MIDI channel match the connected instrument? (p. 197)
(when a MIDI instrument is connected)
Has Local Control been set to “Off”?
No sound is heard when the keyboard is
played
The maximum number of notes can play simultaneously is 128. Frequent use of the damper pedal during automatic
many notes, causing some notes to drop out.
Not all played notes are sounded
The sound is strange
Is the RM-700 in layer play? (p. 38)
Sounds are heard twice (doubled) when the
keyboard is played
When the RM-700 is connected to an external sequencer, set it to the Local Off mode (p. 198).
Alternatively, the sequencer could be set so its Soft Thru feature is Off.
Have you set transpose? (p. 122)
Is the setting for the “Temperament” correct? (p. 32, p. 177)
Is the setting for the “Master Tune” correct? (p. 32, p. 176)
Is the settings for the “Stretch Tuning” correct? (p. 33, p. 177)
The tuning or pitch of the keyboard or song
is off
match, only one of the effects is applied.
Effects cannot be applied to Tones
A note doesn’t stop playing
The Tone has changed
It’s not possible to apply more than one effect at the same time, so when a performance has been recorded on
multiple tracks or when playing along with a song as it’s played back, the desired effect may not be applied.
If automatic accompaniment is stopped and Synchro Start is turned off, playing the left-hand side of the keyboard will
sound a Bass Tone/Chord Tone (p. 64).
The Bass Tone/Chord Tone will stop sounding when you press the One Touch Program [Rhythm] button or press the
[Break] button.
During automatic accompaniment, changing the Music Style automatically changes the Tones and tempo of the
upper part of the keyboard to match the new Music Style. If you want to change only the Music Style without also
altering the tempo and Tone, check out “Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo (Rhythm One
Touch)” (p. 181).
Since the RM-700’s piano sounds faithfully reproduce the sense of spaciousness and reverberation of an actual
acoustic piano’s sound, a certain amount of reverberation is still perceptible, even with the reverb effect deactivated.
Reverberation still audible even with Reverb
turned off
You may be able to decrease this by lowering the Key Off Resonance value (p. 32).
Have you made the correct 3D settings for use with headphones? (p. 44)
Sound from the Output jacks is not right
Changing the 3D “Mode” to “Headphones” or “Auto” and connecting a pair of headphones configures the settings for
use with headphones.
On an acoustic piano, notes in the upper one and a half octaves of the keyboard continue to sound until they decay
naturally, regardless of the damper pedal.
In the upper range, the sound changes
abruptly beyond a certain key
There is a difference in the timbre as well. Roland pianos faithfully simulate such characteristics of the acoustic piano.
The range that is unaffected by the damper pedal will change depending on the Transpose setting.
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Case
Cause/Remedy
When listening through headphones:
Some of the more flamboyant and effervescent piano tones feature an ample high-end component, which may make
the sound appear to have metallic reverberation added. Since this reverberation becomes particularly audible when
supplemented by heavy reverb, you may be able to diminish the problem by reducing the amount of reverb applied
to the sound.
A High-pitched whine is produced
When listening through speakers:
Here, a different cause (such as resonance produced by the RM-700) would be suspect. Consult your Roland dealer or
nearest Roland Service Center.
When listening through speakers:
fluorescent light tubes, glass doors, and other objects. In particular, this problem occurs more easily when the bass
component is increased, and when the sound is played at higher volumes. Use the following measures to suppress
such resonance.
• Reduce the volume.
The bass range sounds odd, or there is a
vibrating resonance
• Move the speakers away from any resonating objects.
When listening through headphones:
Here, a different cause (such as resonance produced by the RM-700) would be suspect. Consult your Roland dealer or
nearest Roland Service Center.
If you set the volume to the maximum setting, the sound may be distorted depending on how you perform.
In this case, lower the volume. Alternatively, you can lower the Master Gain (p. 188).
The automatic accompaniment doesn’t play correctly
Access the Basic screen (p. 27), and then select a tone or Music Style (p. 34, p. 59).
Can’t select a tone or Music Style
Could the [Balance] knob be set all the way toward “Keyboard”? (p. 70)
Could the [Arranger] button be lit? (p. 62)
Automatic accompaniment is not heard
Could a screen other than the Basic screen be shown?
The automatic accompaniment will not sound in some screens, such as the 16-track sequencer or Twin Piano.
Is the setting for “Piano Style Arranger” active? (p. 69)
Chord Intelligence can’t be used
In certain cases, such as when playing Music Styles on external memories, the accompaniment may lag when
excessive amounts of performance data are used.
Accompaniment tempo becomes unstable
Song doesn’t play back correctly
Does the screen indicate message, like “OK to delete song?” (p. 77)
The internal songs cannot be played back while recorded performance data remains in the RM-700’s memory.
Try playing back the song after deleting the performance data.
Is the panel locked? (p. 191)
Song doesn’t play back
Cancel the Panel Lock function.
Could you have played back to the end of the song?
Press the [
(Prev)] button to play back from the beginning of the song.
Is the light for the Track button extinguished? (p. 116)
If the button light is out, the music on that track is not heard. Press the track button so the light is illuminated.
Only the sound of a particular instrument in
a song does not play
Could the part’s volume be set to “0” in the 16-track sequencer? (p. 157)
The fast-forward and reverse buttons are ignored while music files is being read in. Wait until processing finishes.
Can’t fast-forward or rewind
If you attempt to play back performance data that contains more data than the entire capacity of the RM-700’s
memory, you may find that operations other than playback (such as rewind or fast forward) become unavailable.
There are two types of SMF music files: format 0 and format 1. If the song uses SMF format 1 data, there will be a slight
delay until playback starts. Refer to the booklet that came with the music files you’re using to determine the format
type.
There is a slight delay before playback of a
song on external memory starts
With some music files, the lyrics cannot be displayed correctly.
Lyrics are not indicated properly in the
display
In the notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Case
Cause/Remedy
If you select a part that does not contain performance data, notes will not be displayed in the notation.
Change the part that is displayed (p. 109).
Notation is not indicated properly in the
display
The notation screen feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand
accurate notation. Refer to “Notes about the DigiScore” (p. 107).
In the DigiScore screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.
There may be times when a complex variety of information is being displayed or when a large amount of data is
Movement of notation or keyboard display
not smooth
- Set “Bouncing Ball” to “Off”
- Set “Color Notation” to “Off”
- Set “Keyboard” to “Off”
In certain cases, such as when playing songs on external memories, the song may lag when excessive amounts of
performance data are used.
Song becomes unstable
Have you pressed the remote control’s [MUTE] button, muting the sound? (p. 84)
Unable to play back internal songs
Can’t play an audio/MP3 format song
Is the song in a format that the RM-700 is able to play?
For details on audio/MP3 formats, refer to “Types of Audio/MP3 files that the RM-700 can play.”
Is the audio play level set correctly? (p. 70)
Is the CD/Audio Type set correctly? (p. 183)
A music CD song or audio/MP3 format song
does not play correctly
Does the file contain song information (Sequence/Track Name Meta Event)? The song name will not be shown if the
song information in the file is empty or consists only of spaces.
Song name in USB memory or CD-ROM is not
shown
Is the filename extension “MID”?
Files with other filename extensions cannot be handled as song data.
Song titles from a music CD cannot be displayed.
Song titles on a music CD are not shown
Song volume is low
Could the [Balance] knob be set all the way toward “Keyboard”? (p. 70)
Could the [Center Cancel] button be lit? (p. 85)
Press the [Center Cancel] button so it’s turned off.
Can’t hear the vocal of a music CD / Can’t
hear the melody of music files
Vocal sounds from a commercially produced
music CD are not minimized when you press
the [Center Cancel] button
For some commercially available music CDs, the vocal portion cannot be eliminated.
Can’t record
Has one of the track buttons for recording been selected? (p. 131))
Has the setting for “Punch-in Recording” (p. 159) or “Tempo Recording” (p. 169) been made?
Select the replace recording method (p. 159).
Can’t record
It is not possible to record while the notation is being generated.
Once the unit has finished generating the notation (i.e., when the measure number in the screen is no longer
highlighted), try the operation once again.
You cannot overdub with MP3 format song.
If you select an internal song in which the tempo changes during the song, and then record, the tempo will change
in the same way for the performances that are recorded on the other tracks.
The tempo of the metronome will also change in the same way.
Tempo of recorded song or metronome is off
The recorded performance has disappeared
If you record additional material without erasing the previously recorded song, the song will be recorded at the first-
recorded tempo.
Please erase the previously recorded song before you re-record (p. 132).
Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the RM-700 is turned off or a song is selected.
A performance cannot be restored once it’s been deleted.
Be sure to save it on an external memory or User Memory before you turn off the power (p. 134).
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Case
Cause/Remedy
Screen on connected display or television doesn’t look right
Is the external display properly connected (p. 192)?
Is the external display’s power turned on?
Is the video output destination selected correctly? (p. 195)
Are you using a display that is compatible with the RM-700?
Refer to “Types of display that can be connected” (p. 192).
No image is shown in the connected
television or external display
Is the television format specified correctly? (p. 194)
Is the video output aspect ratio set correctly? (p. 194)
Is the Video Out Mode setting appropriate? (p. 195)
If this is set to “Black,” nothing will be displayed if Slide Show, Piano Roll, or DigiScore are off.
Do you have a television and external display connected at the same time? Connect only one of these.
Thin horizontal lines visible in the television
screen
While narrow horizontal lines may be visible in the television screen, this is a particular characteristic of the television
set and does not indicate any problem with the RM-700.
Can’t see the edge of the image on the
television screen
In some cases, the edge of the image may not be visible on the television screen, but this is due to the characteristics
of the television and is not a malfunction on the RM-700.
Poor-quality of images displayed in
television
Even when all recommended settings are used, images may still not be displayed well with the television set you are
using (images may not match the screen size, and may be clustered towards the center of the screen).
Types of Audio/MP3 Files That the RM-700 Can Play
Audio
44.1 kHz
16-bit
Sampling Frequency
Bit Depth
“.wav”
File Extension
MP3
MPEG-1 audio layer 3
Format
44.1 kHz
Sampling Frequency
Bit Rate
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps, VBR (Variable Bit Rate)
“.mp3”
File Extension
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
Indication
Error: 1
Meaning
You can only read the music file. It can not be saved.
An error occurred during writing.
Error: 2
The external media’s protect tab may be in the “Protect” (writing prohibited) position, or the external media
may not yet be initialized.
This CD is not writable.
Error: 3
Error: 4
Error: 5
Error: 6
Insert a writable CD and try the operation again.
An error occurred while writing to the CD.
Check the connection with the CD drive, and try the operation again.
An error occurred while writing to the CD.
The CD may have been damaged. Insert a different writable CD and try the operation again.
Not enough free space on the CD.
Insert a different writable CD and try the operation again.
An error occurred while finalizing the CD.
Error: 7
Check the connection of the CD drive, and try the operation again.
No external media is inserted. Insert the external media and try again.
Error: 10
Error: 11
There is not sufficient free memory in the save destination.
An error occurred during writing. The external media may be corrupted.
Error: 14
Error: 15
Insert other external media and try again. Alternatively, you can initialize the external media.
The file is unreadable. The data format is not compatible with the RM-700.
Data was not called up in time for playback of the song.
Error: 16
Error: 17
Error: 18
After waiting several seconds, you may be able to play back the song by pressing the [
button again.
(Play/Stop)]
The selected image data cannot be displayed.
Prepare image data that can be used with the RM-700 (p. 92).
The song is in an unsupported audio/MP3 format.
Use a song in an audio/MP3 format that the RM-700 supports.
For details on audio/MP3 formats, refer to p. 205.
The internal memory capacity of the RM-700 is full.
Error: 30
Error: 40
The RM-700 cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI device. Reduce the amount
of MIDI data sent to the RM-700.
A MIDI cable has been disconnected. Connect it properly and securely.
Error: 41
Error: 43
A MIDI transmission error has occurred. Check the MIDI cable and connected MIDI device.
There may be a problem with the system. Repeat the procedure from the beginning.
If it is not solved after you have tried several times, contact the Roland service center.
Error: 51
Error: 65
The External Memory port was subjected to excessive current. Make sure that there is no problem with the
external media, then turn the power off, then on again.
*
External Media: USB memory, CD-ROM, etc.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tone List
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
48
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
68 53
32 65 53
64 55
15 Celesta
0
0
5
5
9
13
5
16 Timpani
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
8
5
14 Male Aahs
15 Voice Oohs
16 Voice Oohs 2
17 Opera Voice
18 Choir Hahs
19 Decay Choir
20 Doos Voice
21 Doot Accent
22 Dat Accent
23 Bap Accent
24 Thum Voice
25 Humming
26 SynVox
8
Piano
16 Marimba
17 '60sE.Piano1
18 E. Grand
17 Mellow Str
18 Strings
69 50
64 49
66 49
68 49
69 49
70 49
64 50
65 50
66 50
70 50
64 50
64 45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Superior Grd
0
68
1
1
2
7
3
1
3
4
2
1
3
7
3
3
1
4
1
2
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
2
4
4
4
3
1
1
2
7
7
7
24 67
8
SuperiorGrd2
SuperiorGrd3
Natural Hps.
Superior+EP
Superior+Str
Superior+Pad
RagtimePiano
BrightPiano2
16 67
0
0
0
69
67
3
19 Oct Strings
20 Strings 2
21 DecayStrings
22 Bright Str
23 Slow Strings
24 SlowStrings2
25 Legato Str
26 Sahara Str
27 Decay Str2
28 Tremolo Str
29 Orchestra
30 Choir Str
31 Bell Strings
32 Harp Strings
33 Harp
32 71 53
32 70 53
8
0
66
66
19 Clav.
8
20 Vibrations
21 Tremolo EP
22 Music Box
23 Tubular-bell
24 Church Bell
25 Glockenspiel
26 Xylophone
27 FM+SA EP
28 MIDI Piano1
29 EG+E.Piano 1
30 EG+E.Piano 2
31 Bell Piano
32 Mild E.Grand
33 Stage EP
68 12
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
64 53
65 54
67 54
68 54
69 54
66 54
67 55
47 66
25 64
47 64
16 68
5
11
15
15
10
14
6
0
0
8
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
5
5
0
0
66
64
5
5
10 MellowPiano3
11 Rock Piano 2
12 NaturalC.Hps
13 MagicalPiano
14 Superior+Bel
15 Superior+Cho
16 Honky-tonk 3
17 NaturalGrand
18 Natural Gnd2
19 NaturalMello
20 PianoStrings
21 Piano Str2
16 69
5
8
8
64
66
65
65
65
66
67
71
66
64
68
5
55
1
5
49
27 Analog Voice
69 55
47 65
47 67
26 64
3
32 64 53
Others
Organ
3
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
24
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
67 99
66 47
3
0
0
8
2
8
8
8
0
8
8
64
66
68
64
66
69
70
68
68
65
3
5
47
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ChurchOrgan1
0
0
0
8
0
66 20
70 19
68 22
69 20
69 19
5
34 St. Harp
68 47
Combo Jz.Org
German Acco.
ChurchOrgan3
Ballad Organ
Hand Harm.
Nason flt 8'
34 Soft E.Piano
35 Phase EP
36 E.Piano 1
37 E.Piano 2
38 EP Phase
39 St.FM EP
5
35 Slow Violin
36 Viola
5
5
5
5
41
42
44
16
5
16 64
5
37 Contrabass
38 Santur
0
0
8
5
6
51 64 23
16 66 20
22 Ariel Piano
67
64
6
39 Yang Qin
40 Yang Qin 2
41 Er Hu
65 47
47
64 111
23 Piano Oohs
24 PianoKidsCho
25 Air Grand
6
5
Gospel Spin
La Seine
0
8
8
71 17
65 22
64 20
40 EP Legend
41 Comp Clav.
42 Reso Clav.
43 Phase Clav.
44 Pulse Clav
45 Celesta 2
46 Soft Marimba
47 Vibe Tr.
16 66
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
8
5
8
42 Syn.Strings1
43 Syn.Strings2
44 Syn.Slow Str
45 OB Strings
46 JP Saw Str
47 Warm JP Str
48 OrchestraHit
49 Good Old Hit
50 Euro Hit
5
5
51
52
10 Trem.Flute
11 Light Organ
12 Mellow Harm
13 Organ Flute
14 Full Stops
26 MellowPiano1
27 MellowPiano2
28 Bright Piano
29 DetunedPiano
30 Honky-tonk
31 Honky-tonk 2
32 Rock Piano
16 66
16 68
69
70
71
65
8
32 69 17
50 64 23
8
64 51
65 51
64 52
65 90
0
0
0
8
8
67
65
68
5
8
0
0
0
64 20
69 17
67 22
9
64 13
66 12
65 13
15 ParisRomance
16 Theater Org.
17 Blues Perc
18 Blues Harp
19 All Skate!
5
56
16 64 20
80 64 18
71
48 Marimba Tr.
49 Kalimba
70 56
66 56
65 56
67 56
64 56
64 56
71 56
65 56
33 Ballad Piano
34 UprightPiano
35 Mono Piano
36 Harpsichord
37 Coupled Hps.
38 Harpsichord2
16 65
16 64
5
109
0
68 23
50 Music Box 2
51 Music Bell
52 Music Bell 2
53 Timeline
65 11
64 99
66 11
65 15
51 6th Hit
82 64 18
89 64 18
8
0
8
0
65
65
5
52 Bass Hit
20 B3 Sermon
21 L-Organ
53 Philly Hit
54 Philly Hit 2
55 Mix Hit 1
56 Mix Hit 2
0
0
67 19
64 18
22 Jazz Organ1
23 Mellow Bars
24 Organ 1
64
32 68 17
Strings
E.Piano
0
0
5
5
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Rich Strings
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
8
8
8
0
71 50
65 49
71 49
64 64
67 47
64 41
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Vintage EP
0
0
0
8
67
5
5
12
6
25 Organ 2
Voice
Velo Strings
Dolce Qrt
EX Orchestra
Aerial Harp
Violin
Vibraphone
FM E.Piano 2
EP Belle
26 Lower Organ1
27 Trem. Organ
28 '70s E.Organ
29 '60s Organ
30 Jazz Organ2
31 Jazz Organ3
32 Jazz Organ4
33 Chorus Organ
34 Perc. Organ
35 Rock Organ1
36 Rotary Organ
37 Rotary Org.S
38 Rotary Org.F
0
66 17
68 17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Aerial Choir
8
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
64 53
65 55
67 53
71 99
70 53
65 86
64 53
65 92
68 53
65 53
70
68
0
Jazz Scat
6
32
16
5
5
17
17
Kid's Choir
Pop E.Piano
'60sE.Piano2
Phase Clav.2
Mallet Isle
16 67
24
48 64
5
Dreaming Box
AerialChoir2
Angels Choir
Rich Choir
5
5
32 64 18
Cello
5
5
43
46
8
8
0
8
64 18
65 18
PizzicatoStr
DolceStrings
0
0
64 115
68 50
67 50
65 50
66 49
70 49
67 49
69 47
Stage Phazer
68
5
5
6
5
18
10 Warm Strings
11 Decay Str3
12 Orchestra 2
13 Wind & Str
14 Farewell
Holy Voices
Boys Choir
10 '70s E.Piano
11 FM E.Piano
12 Bell Monitor
13 Ballad Bells
14 Jazzy Vib+Gt
16 66
32 68 18
0
0
0
8
69
0
0
0
0
64 19
68 19
65 19
66 19
10 Mellow Choir
11 Church Choir
12 Beauty Vox
13 Female Aahs
65 15
66
64 12
32 68 53
9
8
8
65 55
66 53
15 Pearly Harp
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tone List
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
39 Grand Pipe
40 ChurchOrgan2
41 Pipe Organ
42 Masked Opera
43 Organ Bass
44 Pipe Org. Bs
45 Digi Church
46 VS Organ
8
0
8
0
8
68 20
65 20
65 20
70 20
65 18
38 Muted Gt.
39 Muted Dis.Gt
40 Dist Rtm GTR
41 Wah Brush Gt
42 Acid Guitar
43 Sitar
0
0
8
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
8
5
29
18 Dark Trumpet
19 Romantic Tp
20 MutedTrumpet
21 MuteTrumpet2
22 Trumpet Fall
23 Trombone 2
24 Twin bones
25 Bones Sect.
26 Bright Tb.
1
1
0
0
8
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
8
0
8
8
8
0
8
66 57
68 57
24 Tenor Sax B
25 Multi-Winds
26 Clarinet
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
27
0
0
0
0
0
0
65 67
65 69
64 29
67 31
64 121
66 85
5
60
5
72
64 60
70 62
27 Flute 2
65 74
28 Recorder
29 Bottle Blow
30 Shakuhachi
31 Whistle
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
75
77
78
79
80
74
110
76
32 65 18
64 21
5
5
5
5
5
5
105
105
106
107
108
108
5
58
0
44 Sitar 2
66 58
68 62
65 58
64 59
32 64 17
32 66 17
45 Banjo
47 Metalic Org.
48 CheeseOrgan
49 Accordion Fr
50 AccordionFr2
51 Accordion It
52 Bright Acco.
53 Soft Acco.
46 Shamisen
47 Koto
32 Ocarina
0
0
0
8
0
8
0
0
65 21
64 22
27 Tuba
33 Qu Di
48 Taisho Koto
28 French Horns
29 French Horn2
30 OrchestraBrs
31 Pop Orch
5
5
61
61
34 Bagpipe
5
5
22
22
35 Pan Flute
36 Lochscape
37 Andes Mood
38 Angel Pipes
39 HimalayaPipe
Bass
65 61
68 49
65 110
66 76
68 76
67 76
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Wild Ac.Bs
0
0
0
0
0
70 33
65 33
66 22
67 22
A.Bass+Cymbl
Acoustic Bs.
Fingered Bs.
Picked Bass
Fretless Bs.
Wood Bass
W.Bass+Ride
Rockabilly
32 Brass 1
5
5
62
62
5
5
5
33
34
35
54 Bandoneon
55 Harmonica
5
24
33 Brass 2
64 23
34 BrassSection
35 PowerBrass
36 Brass sfz
65 62
64 62
67 62
69 62
Pad/Synth
Guitar
48 64 36
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LA Warm Pad
R&B SoftPad
Org Bells
82 64 90
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EX Nylon Gtr
0
0
8
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
71 25
71 26
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
8
8
0
8
8
16
71 33
66 33
69 33
65 34
64 36
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
0
1
8
1
0
0
8
0
0
0
1
0
68 90
64 101
66 90
67 90
65 99
69 89
65 93
69 99
65 95
64 90
68 99
67 90
66 101
67 96
66 82
66 98
65 127
65 103
64 93
65 101
67 101
66 87
67 87
67 82
37 Brass Fall
EX Steel Gt.
JC Chorus Gt
TC Clean ff
38 Africa Brass
39 Wide SynBrss
40 DeepSynBrass
41 Jump Brass
42 Saw Brass1
43 Saw Brass2
44 Synth Brass1
45 Synth Brass2
46 DetuneSawBrs
47 Pro Brass
80 64 64
5
28
68 28
30
Dcy ChoirPad
New Age Pad2
Clear Bells
0
8
65 63
64 63
64 63
66 64
67 63
10 Finger Slap
11 Mr.Smooth
12 Slap Bass 1
13 Slap Bass 2
14 Synth Bass 1
15 Jungle Bass
16 Hammer
Overdrive Gt
Fl.Gtr Roll
5
0
65 25
67 25
67 26
64 28
5
5
5
37
38
39
Mystic Str
0
Flamenco Gtr
EX A.Guitar2
JC Clean Gt.
Glass Pad
0
Himalaya Ice
0
5
5
63
64
64 39
65 39
10 Vox Sweep
11 Soft Pad
0
10 Jazz Guitar
11 DistortionGt
12 Mandolin Tr.
13 Uncle Martin
14 12-str.Gt
5
5
27
31
0
66 63
66 63
17 SynthBass101
18 ResoSH Bass
19 Acid Bass
5
39
64 39
39
64 39
12 Morning Lite
13 Lunar Strngs
14 Trancy X
8
16 64 26
48 SynBrass sfz
16
5
64
8
8
0
0
8
0
0
65 26
26
5
Winds
5
20 Clavi Bass
15 HPF Slicer
16 Electrostars
17 Bending Logo
18 En-co-re
15 EX Ac.Guitar
16 Jazz Guitar2
17 Rock Rhythm
18 Amore Story
19 Nylon Guitar
20 Requint Gtr
21 Steel-str.Gt
22 Steel + Body
23 Nylon+Steel
24 EX A.Guitar3
25 Steel Vox
66 26
65 27
66 31
70 25
21 Synth Bass 2
22 Beef FM Bass
23 Attack Pulse
24 Rubber Bass
5
5
40
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BlowAltoVib
0
0
0
67 66
65 67
66 66
Super Tenor
Sax Section
FluteVibAtk
JazzClariVib
ChamberWinds
Soprano Sax
AltoSax Soft
Baritone Sax
66 40
40
5
52 64 74
50 64 72
19 Side Band X
20 Glasswaves
21 InfinitePhsr
22 X Super Saws
23 Fat Stacks
24 Frgile Saws
25 SuperSawSlow
26 2600 Sine
27 Square Wave
28 Mg Square
29 JP8 Square
30 LM Square
31 Syn.Square
32 CC Solo
5
25
Brass
32 68 25
26
0
0
0
0
0
0
67 69
65
64 66
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Brass & Fall
8
0
1
71 62
65 62
66 61
0
0
8
0
0
8
8
0
0
0
0
8
8
0
0
8
16
5
5
PowerBrass 2
Orch Brass 2
MariachiTp
68 26
68 26
70 26
69 26
5
5
68
69
50 64 57
49 64 57
10 Oboe
Romantic Tp2
EX Tp&Shake
Brass Sect 2
11 Flute
64 74
5
5
5
81
81
81
1
0
1
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65 57
69 62
64 61
69 49
68 60
26 Ukulele
5
5
5
25
27
28
12 FolkClarinet
13 English Horn
14 Bassoon
51 64 72
27 Hawaiian Gt
28 Clean Gt.
0
0
0
0
8
0
8
8
0
0
8
5
5
5
70
71
73
SuperF.Horns
Contemp'Orch
64 81
66 81
64 81
65 81
65 81
66 81
70 81
71 81
64 81
64 88
29 Mid Tone GTR
30 TC Rear Pick
31 Open Hard
32 Feedback Gt.
33 Power Guitar
34 Guitar Pinch
35 Mystic Gtr
36 Funk Gt.
66 28
67 28
65 28
15 Piccolo
10 MuteTrumpet3
11 Trombone
12 Flugel Horn
13 EX Trumpet
14 Trumpet
16 EX Alto Sax
17 AltoSax + Tp
18 Alto Sax
65 66
66 66
5
58
65 61
65 57
64 57
67 57
69 57
70 57
5
31
5
66
33 Sleeper
65 31
65 30
69 28
19 Grow Sax
20 BreathyTenor
21 Tenor Sax
22 Tenor Sax 2
23 Tenor Sax f
64 66
66 67
34 Dual Sqr&Saw
35 Jupiter Lead
36 Sinetific
15 Tp Shake
5
67
16 Bright Tp.
17 Warm Tp.
5
5
29
29
66 67
64 67
37 FM Lead 1
38 FM Lead 2
37 Funk Gt.2
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tone List
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
70 92
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
39 Saw Wave
40 Saw
0
1
8
0
1
0
8
1
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
5
5
82
82
82
95 HumanKindnes
96 Bowed Glass
97 Metal Pad
98 Orbiting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
2
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
8
10 E.Piano 1
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
2
0
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
0
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
0
1
5
66 Mid Tone GTR
67 Muted Gt.
68 Funk Gt.
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
2
0
1
2
3
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
2
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
0
28
29
29
29
29
30
30
31
31
31
32
32
33
34
34
35
36
37
38
39
39
39
39
39
40
40
40
40
41
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
47
48
49
49
49
50
51
51
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
56
56
57
5
5
93
94
11 Detuned EP 1
12 E.Piano 1v
13 '60s E.Piano
14 E.Piano 2
5
41 Doctor Solo
42 Mg Lead
5
64 82
64 82
65 82
64 82
65 82
65 82
67 82
68 82
69 82
70 82
71 82
66 94
67 94
5
69 Funk Gt.2
70 Jazz Man
43 P5 Saw Lead
44 JP SuperSaw
45 Rhythmic Saw
46 Natural Lead
47 SequencedSaw
48 Waspy Synth
49 Velo SawLead
50 Attack Lead
51 DelyResoSaws
52 Wezcoast
99 Visionary
6
100 Halo Pad
5
95
15 Detuned EP 2
16 E.Piano 2v
17 EP Legend
18 EP Phase
6
71 Overdrive Gt
72 Guitar Pinch
73 DistortionGt
74 Feedback Gt.
75 Dist Rtm GTR
76 Gt.Harmonics
77 Gt. Feedback
78 Acoustic Bs.
79 Fingered Bs.
80 Finger Slap
81 Picked Bs.
82 Fretless Bs.
83 Slap Bass 1
84 Slap Bass 2
85 Synth Bass 1
86 SynthBass101
87 Synth Bass 3
88 Clavi Bass
89 Hammer
101 JP8 Sqr Pad
102 Consolament
103 JP-8 Phase
104 Sweep Pad
105 Sweep Pad 2
106 Ice Rain
64 95
66 95
67 95
6
6
6
5
96
64 96
97
19 Harpsichord
20 Coupled Hps.
21 Harpsi.w
7
7
5
7
107 Clavi Pad
65 97
66 97
22 Harpsi.o
7
108 Toy Box
23 Clav.
8
53 Syn.Calliope
54 JP8 Pulse
5
83
109 Soundtrack
110 Crystal
5
5
5
98
99
99
24 Pulse Clav
25 Celesta
8
64 83
65 83
66 83
9
55 LM PureLead
56 Orgaenia
111 Syn Mallet
112 ChristmasBel
113 Vibra Bells
114 Glittery Pad
115 Atmosphere
116 Harpvox
26 Glockenspiel
27 Music Box
28 Vibraphone
29 Vibe.w
10
11
12
12
13
13
14
15
15
15
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
19
20
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
24
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
27
27
28
28
66 99
64 99
70 99
57 Chiffer Lead
58 Cheese Saw
59 JP OctAttack
60 Charang
5
84
64 84
65 84
5
100
30 Marimba
5
85
64 100
65 100
66 100
67 100
68 100
69 100
70 100
71 100
31 Marimba w
32 Xylophone
33 Tubular-bell
34 Church Bell
35 Carillon
61 Reso Saw
64 85
64 85
65 85
117 Nylon Harp
118 Nylon + EP
119 HollowReleas
120 Tubulence
121 Landing Pad
122 Shangri-La
123 Motion Pad
124 Brightness
125 Goblin
62 Wire Lead
63 2600 SubOsc
64 Solo Vox
90 Synth Bass 2
91 Synth Bass 4
92 Rubber Bass
93 Attack Pulse
94 Violin
5
86
64 86
87
65 87
88
65 RAVE Vox
36 Santur
66 5th Saw Wave
67 Freeze Synth
68 Bass & Lead
69 Fat & Perky
70 Delayed Lead
71 Fantasia
5
37 Organ 1
38 Detuned Or.1
39 Pop Organ 1
40 Full Organ
41 Organ 2
5
5
5
101
102
95 Slow Violin
96 Viola
68 88
65 88
126 Saturn Siren
127 RandomEnding
128 Echo Drops
129 Echo Bell
67 102
68 102
97 Cello
5
89
42 Detuned Or.2
43 Jazz Organ1
44 Rock Organ
45 Church Org.1
46 Church Org.2
47 Church Org.3
48 Reed Organ
49 Puff Organ
50 Accordion Fr
51 Accordion It
52 Harmonica
53 Bandoneon
54 Nylon-str.Gt
55 Ukulele
98 Contrabass
99 Tremolo Str
100 PizzicatoStr
101 Harp
72 Fantasia 2
73 New Age Pad
74 Sugar Key
75 FreezinNight
76 New Year Day
77 Warm Pad
78 Sine Pad
64 89
65 89
67 89
70 89
71 89
5
5
5
103
103
103
130 Echo Pan
131 Echo Pan 2
132 Big Panner
133 Ai-yai-a
64 103
64 103
64 103
65 103
102 Yang Qin
103 Timpani
5
90
104 Strings
66 90
69 90
70 90
71 90
64 90
134 Saturn Rings
135 Star Theme
136 Rising Osc
137 Galaxy Way
138 12th Planet
139 PolySweep Nz
105 Orchestra
106 '60s Strings
107 Slow Strings
108 Syn.Strings1
109 Syn.Strings3
110 Syn.Strings2
111 Choir Aahs
112 Choir
79 Nu Epic Pad
80 Hollow Pad
81 Soft Pad 2
82 Decay Pad
83 Polysynth
84 P5 Poly
5
104
64 104
65 104
66 104
65 126
5
91
64 91
65 91
66 91
68 91
69 91
70 91
GM2
85 Poly King
56 Nylon Gt.o
57 Nylon Gt.2
58 Steel-str.Gt
59 12-str.Gt
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Piano 1
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
86 Octave Stack
87 Hoovercraft
88 DOC Stack
89 Bustranza
90 Space Voice
91 Heaven II
113 Pop Voice
114 Humming
115 SynVox
Piano 1w
Piano 1d
Piano 2
60 Mandolin
61 Steel + Body
62 Jazz Guitar
63 Hawaiian Gt
64 Clean Gt.
116 Analog Voice
117 OrchestraHit
118 Bass Hit
Piano 2w
Piano 3
5
92
64 92
66 92
68 92
69 92
Piano 3w
Honky-tonk
92 Warm SquPad
93 Voyager
119 6th Hit
120 Euro Hit
Honky-tonk w
94 Film Cue
65 Chorus Gt.
121 Trumpet
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tone List
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
No. Name
MSB LSB PC
122 Dark Trumpet
123 Trombone
124 Trombone 2
125 Bright Tb.
126 Tuba
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
1
0
1
2
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
4
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
57
58
58
58
59
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
63
63
64
64
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
81
81
82
82
82
82
82
83
84
85
85
86
87
88
88
89
90
90
91
92
92
178 Bowed Glass
179 Metal Pad
180 Halo Pad
181 Sweep Pad
182 Ice Rain
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
93
234 Door
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
125
125
125
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
127
127
127
127
127
127
128
128
128
128
94
235 Scratch
95
236 Windchime
237 Helicopter
238 Car-Engine
239 Car-Stop
240 Car-Pass
241 Car-Crash
242 Siren
96
97
127 MutedTrumpet
128 MuteTrumpet2
129 French Horns
130 French Horn2
131 Brass 1
183 Soundtrack
184 Crystal
98
99
185 Syn Mallet
186 Atmosphere
187 Brightness
188 Goblin
99
100
101
102
103
103
103
104
105
105
106
107
108
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
116
117
117
118
118
119
119
119
120
121
121
121
122
122
123
123
123
123
123
123
124
124
124
124
125
125
125
243 Train
132 Brass 2
244 Jetplane
245 Starship
246 Burst Noise
247 Applause
248 Laughing
249 Screaming
250 Punch
133 Synth Brass1
134 Synth Brass3
135 AnalogBrass1
136 Jump Brass
137 Synth Brass2
138 Synth Brass4
139 AnalogBrass2
140 Soprano Sax
141 Alto Sax
189 Echo Drops
190 Echo Bell
191 Echo Pan
192 Star Theme
193 Sitar
194 Sitar 2
195 Banjo
251 Heart Beat
252 Footsteps
253 Gun Shot
254 Machine Gun
255 Lasergun
256 Explosion
196 Shamisen
197 Koto
142 Tenor Sax
143 Baritone Sax
144 Oboe
198 Taisho Koto
199 Kalimba
200 Bagpipe
201 Fiddle
145 English Horn
146 Bassoon
Drum Set
202 Shanai
POP
0
65
1
147 Clarinet
203 Tinkle Bell
204 Agogo
ROCK
0
64 17
65 41
64 10
64 64
148 Piccolo
JAZZBRUSH
HIP HOP
0
149 Flute
205 Steel Drums
206 Woodblock
207 Castanets
208 Taiko
0
150 Recorder
151 Pan Flute
152 Bottle Blow
153 Shakuhachi
154 Whistle
VOX DRUM
STD CHINA
STANDARD 1
STANDARD 2
STANDARD 3
ROOM
0
0
64
64
64
65
64
0
7
1
0
209 Concert BD
210 Melo. Tom 1
211 Melo. Tom 2
212 Synth Drum
213 808 Tom
214 Elec Perc.
215 Reverse Cym.
216 Gt.FretNoise
217 Gt.Cut Noise
218 String Slap
219 Breath Noise
220 Fl.Key Click
221 Seashore
222 Rain
0
2
0
2
155 Ocarina
0
9
156 Square Wave
157 Square
POWER
0
17
25
26
ELECTRONIC
TR-808/909
DANCE
0
0
158 Sine Wave
159 Saw Wave
160 Saw
0
0
0
64 26
33
64 41
JAZZ
0
0
161 Doctor Solo
162 Natural Lead
163 SequencedSaw
164 Syn.Calliope
165 Chiffer Lead
166 Charang
BRUSH
0
ORCHESTRA
GM2 STANDARD
GM2 ROOM
GM2 POWER
GM2 ELECTRIC
GM2 ANALOG
GM2 JAZZ
GM2 BRUSH
GM2 ORCHSTRA
GM2 SFX
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
49
1
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
9
17
25
26
33
41
49
57
167 Wire Lead
168 Solo Vox
223 Thunder
224 Wind
169 5th Saw Wave
170 Bass & Lead
171 Delayed Lead
172 Fantasia
225 Stream
226 Bubble
227 Bird
228 Dog
173 Warm Pad
174 Sine Pad
229 Horse-Gallop
230 Bird 2
SFX
SOUND EFFECT
0
64 57
175 Polysynth
176 Space Voice
177 Itopia
231 Telephone 1
232 Telephone 2
233 DoorCreaking
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
POP
ROCK
JAZZBRUSH
HIP HOP
VOX DRUM
21
23
R&B Snare
Rock Snare m 1
Rock Snare m 2
R&B Snare
Pop Snare m 2
Pop Snare m 1
R&B Snare
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare m 2
Jungle BD 2
Metronome E.Click
Metronome Pi
R&B Snare
Rock Snare m 1
Rock Snare m 2
22
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m 1
Finger Snap
TR-707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap 2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m 2
Finger Snap 2
TR-707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap 2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m 1
Finger Snap 2
TR-707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap 2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
Concert SD
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Pop Snare m 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m 1
Finger Snap
TR-707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap 2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Vox Dut
24
25
27
26
28
Slap
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jungle BD 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
29
30
32
34
31
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
33
35
Pop Kick 2
Rock Kick 2
Jazz Kick 2
Vox Dom
Pop Kick 1
Rock Kick 1
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Snare Swing 1
Jazz Snare 1
Jazz Snare Swing 2
Jazz Snare 2
Jazz Low Tom f
Pop CHH 1
Jazz Low Tom
Pop CHH 2
Jazz Mid Tom f
Pop OHH
HipHop BD1
TR-808 Rimshot
Power Snare 1A
TR-707 Clap
Power Snare 2A
Low Tom 2
Pop CHH 1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 3
Mid Tom 2
Pop OHH
Vox Tuush
Vox Hehho
Vox Doyear
Vox Thu!
Vox That
Vox Aahhh
Vox Tu
Vox Dooh
Vox Ptu
Vox Down
Vox Pa
C2 36
38
Pop Side Stick
Pop Snare s 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare s 2
Pop Low Tom f
Pop CHH 1
Pop Low Tom
Pop CHH 2
Pop Mid Tom f
Pop OHH
Rock Side Stick
Rock Snare s 1
Pop Snare Ghost
Rock Snare s 2
Rock Low Tom f
Rock CHH 1
Rock Low Tom
Rock CHH 2
Rock Mid Tom f
Rock OHH [EXC1]
Rock Mid Tom
37
39
40
41
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
42
44
46
43
45
47
Pop Mid Tom
Jazz Mid Tom
Mid Tom 1
Vox Bom
Pop High Tom f
Pop Crash Cymbal 1
Pop High Tom
Pop Ride Cymbal 1
Pop Chinees Cymbal
Pop Ride Bell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha CowBell
Pop Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Rock High Tom f
Rock Crash Cymbal
Rock High Tom
Rock Ride Cymbal 1
Pop Chinees Cymbal
Pop Ride Bell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha CowBell
Chinees Cymbal
Vibra-slap
Jazz High Tom f
Jazz Crash Cymbal 1
Jazz High Tom
Jazz Ride Cymbal 1
Jazz Chinees Cymbal
Jazz Ride Cymbal 2
Tambourine 2
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 3
High Tom 1
Vox Toear
Vox Aahhu
Vox Toya
Vox Thu
Vox Cheey
Vox Cymm
Vox Tub
Vox Pruru
Vox Tut
Vox Tyun
Vox Tdum
Vox Afahhhh
C3 48
50
49
51
Ride Cymbal 1
Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell
Shake Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
TR-808 Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
52
53
54
56
58
Splash Cymbal
55
Cha Cha CowBell
Jazz Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
57
59
Pop Ride Cymbal 2
Pop Ride Cymbal 3
Jazz Ride Cymbal 3
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute High Conga 2
Open High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
HipVibraslap
TR-808 Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
High Hoo
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
73
75
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
77
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
78
80
82
Low Hoo
79
Mute Triangle2
Open Triangle 2
Shaker
81
83
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause 2
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
C6 84
86
85
87
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
Hi-Timbale Flam
Lo-Timbale Flam
Timbale Phrase
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
Hi-Timbale Flam
Lo-Timbale Flam
Timbale Phrase
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
Hi-Timbale Flam
Lo-Timbale Flam
Timbale Phrase
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
HipHop SD 2
LoFi SD Rim
TR-808 Clap
Room Snare 1
Standard 1 Snare 2A
Room Snare 2
Standard 1 Snare 1
Hi-Timbale Flam
Lo-Timbale Flam
Timbale Phrase
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
89
90
92
94
91
93
95
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Standard 1 Snare 2B
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Tape Rewind
Phono Noise
Room Snare 1
Room Snare 2A
Elec Snare 4A
-----
-----
-----
-----
C7 96
98
97
99
100
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Bongo CowBell
-----
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Bongo CowBell
-----
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Bongo CowBell
-----
Flamenco Hand Clap
Flamenco Hand Clap
Bongo CowBell
-----
101
103
105
102
104
106
Bongo CowBell
Bongo CowBell
Bongo CowBell
Bongo CowBell
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
107
108
-----
-----
-----
Elec Snare 4B
-----
C8
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
STD CHINA
STANDARD 1
STANDARD 2
STANDARD 3
ROOM
21
23
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
22
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
24
25
27
26
28
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pul
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard 1 Kick 1
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard 1 Kick 1
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard 2 Kick 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard 3 Kick 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Room Kick 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
29
30
32
34
31
33
35
Standard 1 Kick 2
Side Stick 1
Standard 1 Snare 1
TR-909 Clap
Standard 1 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Close Hi-hat1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 1
Standard 1 Kick 2
Side Stick 1
Standard 1 Snare 1
TR-909 Clap
Standard 1 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Close Hi-hat1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 1
Standard 2 Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Standard 2 Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
Standard 2 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 2
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 2
Mid Tom 1
Standard 3 Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Standard 3 Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
Standard 3 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 3
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 3
Mid Tom 1
Room Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Room Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
Room Snare 2
Room Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 4
Room Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Room Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 4
Room Mid Tom 1
C2 36
38
37
39
40
41
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
42
44
46
43
45
47
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Room High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Room High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
55
57
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
59
-----
-----
-----
Cana
Ban Gu 1
Taiko 1
Nao Bo
Taiko 2
Xiao Bo 1
Taiko 3
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
[EXC8]
[EXC8]
66
68
70
67
69
Open High HuYinLuo [EXC8]
Taiko 4
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Taiko 5
Open High HuYinLuo 1
Taiko 6
Shou Luo 1
Mute Low HuYinLuo 2
Shou Luo 2
Xiao Bo 2
Ban Gu 2
Xiao Bo 3
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
73
75
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
77
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
78
80
82
79
81
Open High HuYinLuo 3
Mute High HuYinLuo
Mute Low HuYinLuo 1
83
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
C6 84
86
85
87
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
89
90
92
94
91
93
95
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
C7 96
98
Open Sagat
Close Sagat
Ban Gu 1
Ban Gu 3
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
97
99
100
101
103
105
102
104
106
107
108
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
C8
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
POWER
ELECTRONIC
TR-808/909
DANCE
JAZZ
21
23
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
22
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
24
25
27
26
28
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Power Kick2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push 2
Scratch Pull 2
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Elec Kick 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push 2
Scratch Pull 2
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
TR-909 Kick
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push 2
Scratch Pull 2
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
TR-808 Kick 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jazz Kick 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
29
30
32
34
31
33
35
Power Kick1
Side Stick 2
Dance Snare1
TR-808 Clap
Power Snare 1
Power Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 4
Power Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Power Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 4
Power Mid Tom 1
Elec Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Elec Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
TR-808 Kick
HipHop BD1
Side Stick 2
Power Snare 2
TR-808 Clap
Elec Snare 3
Elec Low Tom 2
CR-78 CHH
Elec Low Tom 1
TR-808 CHH
Elec Mid Tom 2
CR-78 OHH
Jazz Kick 1
C2 36
38
TR-808 Rimshot
TR-808 Snare 1
TR-808 Clap
TR-909 Snare 1
TR-808 Low Tom 2
TR-808 CHH
TR-808 Low Tom 1
TR-808 CHH
TR-808 Mid Tom 2
TR-808 OHH
Side Stick 2
Jazz Snare 1
Hand Clap 3
Standard 2 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 3
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Mid Tom 2
37
39
40
Elec Snare 2
Elec Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 3
Elec Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Elec Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 3
Elec Mid Tom 1
41
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
42
44
46
43
45
Open Hi-hat 3
Mid Tom 1
47
TR-808 Mid Tom 1
Elec Mid Tom 1
Power High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Power High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Elec High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Elec High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
TR-808 High Tom 2
TR-808 Cymbal
TR-808 High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Elec High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Elec High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
Tambourine
Tambourine
54
56
58
Splash Cymbal
TR-808 Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Splash Cymbal
TR-808 Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
55
57
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
59
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
TR-808 High Conga
TR-808 Mid Conga
TR-808 Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
TR-808 Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
TR-808 Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
73
75
TR-808 Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
TR-808 Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
High Hoo
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
77
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
78
80
82
Open Cuica
Low Hoo
79
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
81
83
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
C6 84
86
85
87
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
-----
89
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
90
92
94
91
93
95
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
C7 96
98
97
99
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
100
101
103
105
102
104
106
107
108
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
C8
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
BRUSH
ORCHESTRA
21
23
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
22
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
24
25
27
Finger Snap
Closed Hi-hat 3
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Open Hi-hat 3
Ride Cymbal 1
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jazz Kick 1
26
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
28
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jazz Kick 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
29
30
32
34
31
33
35
Jazz Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Low Tom 2
Brush Closed Hi-hat [EXC1]
Brush Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Brush Mid Tom 2
Brush Open Hi-hat [EXC1]
Brush Mid Tom 1
Concert BD
Side Stick 2
Concert SD
Castanets
Concert SD
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
C2 36
38
37
39
40
41
42
44
46
43
[EXC1]
45
47
Brush High Tom 2
Brush Crash Cymbal
Brush High Tom 1
Brush Ride Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Brush Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
Timpani f
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Concert Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
55
57
59
Ride Cymbal 2
Concert Cymbal 1
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
High Bongo 1
Low Bongo 1
Mute High Conga 1
Open High Conga 1
Low Conga 1
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
73
75
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
77
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
78
80
82
79
81
83
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
C6 84
86
85
87
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
-----
89
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
90
92
94
91
93
-----
-----
95
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
C7 96
98
97
99
100
101
103
105
102
104
106
107
108
-----
-----
C8
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
GM2 STANDARD
GM2 ROOM
GM2 POWER
GM2 ELECTRIC
GM2 ANALOG
21
23
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
22
-----
-----
-----
High Q
Slap
-----
-----
-----
High Q
-----
-----
-----
High Q
-----
-----
-----
High Q
-----
-----
-----
High Q
24
25
27
26
28
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard 1 Kick 1
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Room Kick 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Power Kick2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push 2
Scratch Pull 2
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Elec Kick 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Analog Kick 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
29
30
32
34
31
33
35
Standard 1 Kick 2
Side Stick 1
Standard 1 Snare 2
TR-909 Clap
Elec Snare 5
Low Tom 2
Close Hi-hat1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 2
Room Kick 3
Side Stick 2
Room Snare 1
TR-909 Clap
Elec Snare 5
Room Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 4
Room Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Room Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 4
Room Mid Tom 1
Power Kick1
Side Stick 2
Dance Snare1
TR-909 Clap
Elec Snare 5
Power Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 4
Power Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Power Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 4
Power Mid Tom 1
Elec Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Elec Snare 1
TR-909 Clap
Analog Kick 1
C2 36
38
TR-808 Rimshot
TR-808 Snare 1
Analog Clap
Elec Snare 5
Analog Low Tom 2
TR-808 CHH
Analog Low Tom 1
TR-808 CHH
Analog Mid Tom 2
TR-808 OHH
37
39
40
Elec Snare 2
Elec Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 3
Elec Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Elec Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 3
Elec Mid Tom 1
41
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
42
44
46
43
45
Open Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 1
47
Analog Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Room High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Room High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Power High Tom 4
Crash Cymbal 1
Power High Tom 3
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Elec High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Elec High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Analog High Tom 2
TR-808 Cymbal
Analog High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
Tambourine
54
56
58
Splash Cymbal
TR-808 Cowbell
Concert Cymbal 3
Vibra-slap
55
57
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
59
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute High Conga 2
Open High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute High Conga 2
Open High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute High Conga 2
Open High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute High Conga 2
Open High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 3
Low Bongo 3
C4 60
62
61
63
TR-808 High Conga
TR-808 Mid Conga
TR-808 Low Conga
High Timbale 2
Low Timbale 2
High Agogo 2
Low Agogo 2
Cabasa 2
Analog Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
73
75
Analog Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
77
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
78
80
82
Open Cuica
79
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
81
83
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
C6 84
86
85
87
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
89
90
92
94
91
93
95
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
C7 96
98
97
99
100
101
103
105
102
104
106
107
108
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
C8
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Set List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
GM2 JAZZ
GM2 BRUSH
GM2 ORCHSTRA
GM2 SFX
SOUND EFFECT
21
23
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
22
-----
-----
-----
High Q
-----
-----
-----
High Q
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
24
25
27
26
Closed Hi-hat 3
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Open Hi-hat 3
Ride Cymbal 1
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Concert BD 2
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
28
Slap
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jazz Kick 4
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jazz Kick 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
29
30
32
34
31
33
35
Jazz Kick 3
Side Stick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Side Stick 2
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl 2
Brush Low Tom 2
Brush Closed Hi-hat [EXC1]
Brush Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Brush Mid Tom 2
Brush Open Hi-hat [EXC1]
Brush Mid Tom 1
Concert BD
Side Stick 2
Concert SD
Castanets
Concert SD
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
-----
-----
-----
High Q
-----
-----
-----
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Guitar sliding Finger
C2 36
38
37
39
Jazz Snare 3
Hand Clap 4
Standard 2 Snare 2
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 5
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 4
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 5
Mid Tom 1
40
Slap
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Guitar sliding Finger
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
41
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
42
44
46
43
[EXC1]
45
47
Guitar cutting noise (up)
Guitar cutting noise (down)
String slap of double bass
Fl.Key Click
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps1
Footsteps2
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Brush High Tom 2
Brush Crash Cymbal
Brush High Tom 1
Brush Ride Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Brush Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
Timpani f
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Concert Cymbal 4
Vibra-slap
Guitar cutting noise (up)
Guitar cutting noise (down)
String slap of double bass
Fl.Key Click
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps1
Footsteps2
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
55
57
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
Applause
Door Creaking
Applause
Door Creaking
59
Ride Cymbal 2
Concert Cymbal 1
Door
Scratch
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute High Conga 2
Open High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute High Conga 2
Open High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute High Conga 2
Open High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Door
Scratch
C4 60
62
61
63
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
64
65
66
68
70
67
Train
Train
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
69
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
C5 72
74
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
73
75
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle1
Open Triangle 1
Shaker
77
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
78
80
82
79
81
Seashore
Stream
Seashore
Stream
83
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bubble
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bubble
Cat
Bird
C6 84
86
85
87
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
BabyLaughing
Boeeeen
Glass & Glam
Ice Ring
Crack Bottle
Pour Bottle
Car Horn
R.Crossing
SL 1
88
89
90
92
94
91
93
-----
-----
95
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
SL 2
Seal
Fancy Animal
Elephant
Bike
-----
Small Club
-----
-----
-----
C7 96
98
97
99
100
101
103
105
102
104
106
-----
-----
-----
107
108
-----
-----
-----
-----
C8
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects List
Effect Type
Explanation
Effect Type
Rotary
Explanation
Equalizer
Spectrum
Enhancer
This is a four-band stereo equalizer (low, high).
This is a stereo spectrum.
The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary
speakers often used with the electric organs of the past.
This type provides modified response for the rotary
speaker, with the low end boosted further.
Rotary2
Adds sparkle and tightness to the sound.
Adds a special effect to the sound by cutting the volume
in varying ranges.
Rotary Multi
Stereo Delay1
It comprises vibrato/chorus, overdrive, and rotary effects.
Isolator
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a length of
one eighth note.
Boosts the volume of the lower range, creating powerful
lows.
Low Boost
High Pass Filter
Overdrive
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a length of
one quarter-note triplet.
Stereo Delay2
Stereo Delay3
Stereo Delay4
Stereo Delay5
This is a low-cut filter. It cuts the low-frequency
component.
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a length of
one dotted eighth note.
Creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by
vacuum tube amplifiers.
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a length of
one quarter note.
Distortion
Overdrive2
Distortion2
Produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive.
This is an overdrive that provides heavy distortion.
This is a distortion effect that provides heavy distortion.
This is a stereo delay. The delay time is set to a length of
one half note.
Monaural Delay
Modulation Delay
Triple Tap Delay
3D Delay
This is a monaural delay.
Speaker
Simulator
Simulates the speaker type and mic settings used to
record the speaker sound.
Adds modulation to the delayed sound.
Produces three delay sounds; center, left and right.
This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound.
Guitar Amp
Simulator
This is an effect that simulates the sound of a guitar
amplifier.
A phase-shifted sound is added to the original sound and
modulated.
Phaser
A virtual tape echo that produces a realistic tape delay
sound.
Tape Echo
Multi Stage
Phaser
Extremely high settings of the phase difference produce a
deep phaser effect.
This is a reverse delay that adds a reversed and delayed
sound to the input sound.
Reverse Delay
A phaser that continues raising/lowering the frequency at
which the sound is modulated.
Infinite Phaser
This is an effect that intentionally degrades the sound
quality for creative purposes.
Lo-Fi
It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a
jet airplane taking off or landing.
Stereo Flanger
3D Flanger
Telephone
Gate Reverb
This applies a telephone sound.
This applies a 3D effect to the flanger sound.
This is a special type of reverb in which the reverberant
sound is cut off before its natural length.
A flanger that lets you apply an effect independently to
the low-frequency and high-frequency ranges.
2Band Flanger
Auto Wah
Overdrive ->
Chorus
This effect connects an overdrive and a chorus in series.
This effect connects an overdrive and a flanger in series.
This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in series.
This effect connects an distortion and a chorus in series.
This effect connects an distortion and a flanger in series.
This effect connects an distortion and a delay in series.
This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in series.
This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in series.
Cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in timbre.
Overdrive ->
Flanger
Adds a vowel character to the sound, making it similar to
a human voice.
Humanizer
Overdrive ->
Delay
This is an effect that applies amplitude modulation (AM) to
the input signal, producing bell-like sounds.
Ring Modulator
Distortion ->
Chorus
Cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to
the sound.
Tremolo
Auto Pan
Distortion ->
Flanger
Cyclically modulates the stereo location of the sound.
By applying successive cuts to the sound, this effect turns
a conventional sound into a sound that appears to be
played as a backing phrase.
Distortion ->
Delay
Slicer
Enhancer ->
Chorus
Flattens out high levels and boosts low levels, smoothing
out fluctuations in volume.
Compressor
Enhancer ->
Flanger
Compresses signals that exceed a specified volume level,
preventing distortion from occurring.
Limiter
Enhancer -> Delay
Chorus -> Delay
Flanger -> Delay
Chorus -> Flanger
This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in series.
This effect connects a chorus and a delay in series.
This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series.
This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in series.
Stereo Chorus
Hexa Chorus
This is a stereo chorus.
Uses a six-phase chorus (six layers of chorused sound) to
give richness and spatial spread to the sound.
This is a chorus effect with added Tremolo (cyclic
modulation of volume).
Tremolo Chorus
On an acoustic piano, holding down the damper pedal
allows other strings to resonate in sympathy with the
notes you play, creating rich and spacious resonances.
This effect simulates these damper resonances.
Space D
Produces a transparent chorus effect.
Damper
Resonance
3D Chorus
This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound.
A chorus effect that lets you apply an effect independently
to the low-frequency and high-frequency ranges.
2 Band Chorus
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Music Style List
Fun Pop
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
Pop/Rock
Country/Gospel
Oldies
Ballad
Funky Pop
Happy Beat
Groovin'
AmericanRock
16BtBrassRck
Guitar Lady
'80s Rock
SwinginCntry
SouthrnTwang
SteamtrainCt
GospelPraise
AmazingGospl
Gospel Bars
GospelBallad
Revival
'50s HitSong
Clock Rock'n
Oldies
Love Ballad
Love Beat
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MidniteBalad
Piano Ballad
Cute Ballad
Romantic Bld
Movie Ballad
Broadway Bld
TheUnplugged
6/8 GtBallad
ShufflBallad
Piano PopBld
Romantic 6/8
8BeatBallad1
Angel Ballad
6/8 Ballad
Pop Shuffle
ShufflFusion
Soft Ballad
So Easy
Rock'n Slow
Detroit Pop
Motown
Pop
Joe's Rock
Alabama Rock
Gold Disco
Gold Beat
Mersey Beat
Fast Surf
UK Rock 21st
Warm Pop
Light Beat
Light Pop
Light Soul
Live Pop
CntryBallad1
Country Beat
Baby Rock'n
Beach Surf
Rock'n'Roll2
Rock'n'Fever
Good Rock'n
SmoothRock'n
Twist Pop
9
9
9
Gold MedBeat
GoldSlowBeat
Gtr Arpeggio
6/8 Pop
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
NewBluegrass
CountryBlues
GospelShuffl
ContPraise 1
ContPraise 2
Country Rock
GospelGuitar
CountrySlide
Saddle Swing
Gospel Piano
Gospel Pop
Gospel Shout
Soft Gospel
Slow Country
CountryRock1
Cajun
Night Pop
UK Rock'n
Real Band
Strummin'Pop
Adult Pop 2
FastBtGuitar
Power Pop
UK Pop
'80s Pop
Blue Pop
Easy 8-Beat
ContmpBallad
Countdown Rk
Disco Pop
Let's Twist
DreamSlwRock
'50s SlowRock
Madison
Dream Ballad
Euro Ballad
Idol Ballad
'70s 2
German Oldie
Oldies 6/8
Night Ballad
UnplugBallad
Fireside
80sRetroDsco
Barry Dance
Earth Boogie
Groovy Pop
SurviveDisco
Natural Pop
Adult Pop 1
Easy Beat
Smooth Beat
Guitar Pop
'70s Groove
Poppin'
Oldies Pop
It's Oldies
8BeatBallad2
Nice Ballad
Rockabilly
Twisting
Soft Beat
Soul
Country
Sunshine Pop
Sweet Beat
Bright Pop
'70s Pop
Bluegrass
Color Beat
CoolLiveBand
Cool Pop
D Country 1
Breaky Rock
Pop Fox
Acoustic
P.Pop 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Soul Pop
Dark Rock
Country Fox
'60s Rock'n
Guitar Beat
Happy Pop
Cute Country
CntryBallad2
It's Country
Cajun Time
P.Classic 1
P.Bossa Nova
P.Ragtime
P.Ballad 2
P.Rock'nRoll
P.Concerto 2
P.Boogie
New Metal
Riverpool
Alternative1
16-Beat Pop
Easy Groove
Easy Rock
Funky
Fire Rock
Morn Pop
UnpluggedPop
CoolSlowRock
Cool Soul
P.Night
9
P.Classic 2
P.Swing Pop
P.Concerto 1
P.Swing
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Easy Pop
EasySlowRock
Power Rock
Radio Pop
P.Shuffle
Housing
P.'50s Rock
P.Latin
Ibiza Night
Dancin'
Trendy Beat
Wahoo Groove
Ladies Dance
Nice Groove
Dream Dance
Contemp Beat
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Music Style List
Fast Gypsy
FastMerengue
Folk Tango 1
Plena
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Jazz/Swing
Latin
Trad/Waltz
World
BennysBigBnd
BigAppleBand
BigBand Fast
BigBand Med
BigBand Slow
Breezy Swing
Trad BigBand
Gold Swing
Big Band 3
Gold Bossa
Gold Rumba
Gold Samba
ChaCha Time
Gold Tango
Night Bossa
Paso Doble
Slow Beguine
Acoust Rumba
Acoust Samba
Tango Time
Big Mambo
Hot Beguine
Brazil Samba
Calypso
Gold Foxtrot
Gold SlWaltz
Dixieland
Ireland
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Scotland
Musette
Cumbia NEO
It's Cumbia
Up Samba
Jogetmly
Hula Time
Musical
OrchMariachi
Vienne
PnoBndBoogie
Movie March
Ragtime
Mariachi
Alpenwalzer
Celtic
Caribbean
Samba Time
Dixie Swing
Simple Waltz
Polka Rag
AustrianWalz
ShufflSchlgr
Japan
9
9
9
9
Biggest Band
MidniteSlSwg
Scat Swing
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Pub Boogie
Music Hall
Hula
Irish Dance
Reggae Man
Orch.Polka
French Java
AustrianPolk
Alpen Party
Irish
SmoothMedSwg
Orch.Swing
Fast Swing
Hawaiian Wlz
Hawaiian
ComboFastSwg
Ensemble Swg
Gypsy Swing
Jazz BigBand
Jazz Club
New ChaCha
Bossa Nova 3
ModernChaCha
Trad Tango
Cuba Salsa
March
Gold Jive
Gold WienWlz
Epic Movie
Cowboy Movie
Classical
Schlager 6/8
Schlager Pop
SchlagerRock
StadlSchlger
AlpenSchlger
2-Beat
JazzGtrSwing
ClassicSwing
Jazzy
Dream ChaCha
Fast Bossa
Mambo 3
Holiday 1
Organ Swing
MustangBlues
MidniteBlues
A Cappella
Merengue
Holiday 2
Orch.Bossa
Orch.ChaCha
Orch.Samba
Paso Doble 2
Piano Latin
Rumba Love
Hot Salsa
Holiday 3
Irish Tune
It's French
Schlager
PianoRagtime
Boston Waltz
Ballroom Wlz
Nice Fox
JimmysGroove
Gtr Shuffle
Fast Blues
Piano Night
Piano Jazz
Charming Wlz
Slow JzWaltz
Slow Fox
Hot Samba
SimpleCumbia
SimplyChaCha
SunshineBosa
Bossa Nova 1
BallroomTngo
That's Mambo
ChaCha 4
MedJazzWaltz
Medium Jazz
Medium Blues
Deep Blues
Piano Waltz
Orch.SlowFox
Folk Valzer1
Dixie
NewCharlestn
MarchingBand
ViennaWaltz2
Foxtrot 2
Trad Cumbia
Slow Rumba
Orch.Bolero
Go! Salsa
New Fox
Blue Boogie
Slow Waltz 2
Orch.Waltz
Quiet Waltz
Polka Yanks
Polka Party
Jive
Guitar Bossa
Guitar Samba
Jazz Bossa
Jazz Latin
Latin Dance
CoolMerengue
Medium Gypsy
Latin
It's Boogie
Polka Time
Tarantella
Arg.Tango
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chord List
* ● symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.
* ★ symbol: Chord shown with an “★”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “★” (p. 56).
C
C#
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
F
Cmaj7
C7
C#maj7
C#7
Dmaj7
D7
maj7
7
Emaj7
E7
Fmaj7
F7
Cm
C#m
Dm
m
Em
Fm
Cm7
Cdim
C#m7
C#dim
Dm7
Ddim
m7
dim
Em7
Edim
Fm7
Fdim
Cm7 ( 5 )
Caug
C#m7 ( 5 )
C#aug
C#sus4
C#7sus4
C#6
Dm7 ( 5 )
Daug
E
E
E
E
E
E
m7 ( 5 )
Em7 ( 5 )
Eaug
Fm7 ( 5 )
Faug
aug
Csus4
C7sus4
C6
Dsus4
D7sus4
D6
sus4
7sus4
6
Esus4
E7sus4
E6
Fsus4
F7sus4
F6
Cm6
C#m6
Dm6
m6
Em6
Fm6
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chord List
* ● symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.
* ★ symbol: Chord shown with an “★”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “★” (p. 56).
F#
G
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
F#maj7
F#7
Gmaj7
G7
maj7
7
Amaj7
A7
maj7
7
Bmaj7
B7
F#m
Gm
m
Am
m
Bm
F#m7
F#dim
F#m7 ( 5 )
F#aug
F#sus4
Gm7
Gdim
Gm7 ( 5 )
Gaug
Gsus4
m7
Am7
Adim
Am7 ( 5 )
Aaug
Asus4
m7
Bm7
Bdim
Bm7 ( 5 )
Baug
Bsus4
dim
m7 ( 5 )
aug
sus4
dim
m7 ( 5 )
aug
sus4
F#7sus4
F#6
G7sus4
G6
A
A
7sus4
6
A7sus4
A6
B
B
7sus4
6
B7sus4
B6
F#m6
Gm6
A
m6
Am6
B
m6
Bm6
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internal Song List
Clair de Lune
Turkish March
Türkischer Marsch (Mozart)
Serenade
Classical
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Clair de Lune
Upper line:
Song title displayed by the RM-700
Etude, Op. 10, no. 5
Étude, op.10-5
Lower line:
Ständchen
Song title given in the included music collection
“Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces”
Doctor Gradus ad Parnassum
Doctor Gradus ad Parnassum
Grande Valse Brillante
Grande Valse Brillante
A Maiden’s Prayer
La prière d’une Vierge
Troika
Humoresque
Song numbers 5–8 and 65–68 are not part of
“Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces.”
Humoreske
The Flower Song
Blumenlied
Sonata No. 15
1
Sonate für klavier No.15
Alpine Bells
Liebestraume 3
Alpenglöckchen
Minuet in G
2
Liebesträume III
Etude, Op. 10, no. 3
Course en Troïka
To The Spring
Menuett G dur (Beethoven)
Song without Words
Venezianisches Gondellied
Alpenabendrote
Alpenabendröte
Farewell to the Piano
Farewell to the Piano
Bridal Chorus
3
Étude, op.10-3
Je te veux
To The Spring
4
Je te veux
Waltz, Op. 64, no. 2
Valse, op.64-2
The Girl with the Flaxen Hair
5
---
Radetsky March
Radetzky Marsch
Traumerei
The Little Bell
6
---
Scherzo No. 2
Träumerei
Brautchor
7
---
Moment Musical 3
Moments Musicaux III
Prelude, Op. 28, no. 15
Prélude, op.28-15
The Harmonious Blacksmith
The harmonious blacksmith
Hungarian Dance No.5
Ungarische Tänze V
Turkish March
Battle of Waterloo
Battle of Waterloo
Weiner March
Wiener Marsch
Etude, Op. 10, no. 12
8
---
Waltz, Op.64, no. 1
9
Valse, op.64-1
The Cuckoo
Golliwog’s Cakewalk
10
Le Coucou
Golliwog’s Cake walk
Minuet in G
Fantasy Impromptu
11
Menuett G dur (Bach)
The Spinning Song
Spinnerlied
Fantaisie-Impromptu
Arabesque 1
12
Türkischer Marsch (Beethoven)
Nocturne No. 2
Nocturne No.2
1ève Arabesque
Gavotte
Blue Danube Waltz
13
Gavotte
An der schönen, blauen Donau
Spring Song
Heather Rose
On Wings of Song
14
Frühlingslied
Heidenröslein
Auf Flügeln des Gesanges
Prelude in C Major
Präludium
Gypsy Dance
Mazurka No. 5
15
Zigeuner Tanz
Mazurka No.5
Jagerlied
La Cinquantaine
La Cinquantaine
Csikos Post
Gymnopedie 1
16
Jägerlied
1ève Gymnopédie
Menuet Antique
Menuet Antique
Etude, Op. 25, no. 1
Csikos Post
17
Étude, op.25-1
Fur Elise
Dolly’s Dreaming Awakening
Dolly’s Dreaming Awakening
Für Elise
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internal Song List
La Violette
Beyer 15
Invention 9
Invention 10
Invention 11
Invention 12
Invention 13
Invention 14
Invention 15
Openness
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
La Violette
Beyer 21
The Happy Farmer
Fröhlicher Landmann
Sonatina, Op. 36, no. 1
Sonatine op.36-1 (Clementi)
Sonatina, Op. 20, no. 1
Sonatine op.20-1 (Kuhlau)
Sonatina No. 5
Sonatine No.5 (Beethoven)
Sonata
Beyer 25
Beyer 29
Beyer 34
Beyer 38
Beyer 42
Beyer 46
Beyer 51
Arabesque
Pastoral
Beyer 55
---
Beyer 60
A Small Gathering
Innocence
Italian Concerto
---
Beyer 64
Beyer 67
Progress
Impromptu, Op. 90, no. 2
---
Beyer 73
The Clear Stream
Gracefulness
The Hunt
Beyer 78
Gnossienne 1
---
Beyer 81
Beyer 90
Tender Flower
The Young Shepherdess
Farewell
Exercises/Hanon
Beyer 93
Hanon 1
Hanon 2
Hanon 3
Hanon 4
Hanon 5
Hanon 6
Hanon 7
Hanon 8
Hanon 9
Hanon 10
Hanon 11
Hanon 12
Hanon 13
Hanon 14
Hanon 15
Hanon 16
Hanon 17
Hanon 18
Hanon 19
Hanon 20
1
Beyer 98
2
Beyer 103
Czerny 100- 1
Czerny 100-10
Czerny 100-20
Czerny 100-30
Czerny 100-38
Czerny 100-43
Czerny 100-60
Czerny 100-75
Czerny 100-86
Czerny 100-96
Invention 1
Invention 2
Invention 3
Invention 4
Invention 5
Invention 6
Invention 7
Invention 8
Consolation
Austrian Dance
Ballad
3
4
5
Sighing
6
The Chatterbox
Restlessness
Ave Maria
7
8
9
Tarantella
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Angelic Harmony
Gondola Song
The Return
The Swallow
The Knight Errant
Ez Songs
Annie Laurie
1
2
3
4
5
Londonderry Air
Amazing Grace
Ave Maria
Entertainer
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internal Song List
Greensleeves
Largo
6
44
45
46
47
Hallelujah Chorus
Little Brown Jug
When the Saints Go Marchin’ in
Stagecoach
Trepak
7
A Little Night Music
Spring
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Contemporary
Old MacDonald Had a Farm
Twinkle Twinkle, Little Star
Mary Had a Little Lamb
London Bridge
My Pleasure
1
Autumn Morning
Trio Grande
2
3
Wedding Song
L’éveil de l’amour
Preludelight
4
Jingle Bells
5
Silent Night, Holy Night
Joy to the World
Grandfather’s Clock
Puppy’s March
6
Blue Sky Rag
7
Late Night Chopin
Sun Daze
8
9
Frog Song
Keepers Tale
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Little Fox
Secret Agent
Lightly Row
Kismet’s Salsa
Roll Over Ludwig
A Prelude To •••
Count On The Blues
One Down And Easy
Bach’s A Boppin’
From Matthew’s Passion
Hungarian Rag
Paganini Boogie
Fly Flee
The Cuckoo
The Girl with the Flaxen Hair
The Little Bell
Air on the G String
Fantasy Impromptu
Grande Valse Brilliante
Gymnopedie 1
Liebestraume 3
Moonlight Sonata
Nocturne No. 2
*
All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this
material for purposes other than private,
personal enjoyment is a violation of
applicable laws.
Minute Waltz
Prelude, Op. 28, no. 15
Traumerei
Turkish March
Hungarian Dance No. 5
Die Lorelei
The Skater’s Waltz
Brindisi
O Sole Mio
Divertimento
Canon in D
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters Stored to Internal Memory
Parameters Stored in the User Program
Parameters Stored in Memory Backup
Items that change immediately when you recall a User
Program, regardless of the User Program’s <Arranger
Update> setting
On/Off, Depth, Mode
3D
Brilliance, Dynamics, Dynamics Mode
Tone Control
On/Off, Equalizer Number,
Equalizer settings for each number
Equalizer
Tuning
Tone, Octave Shift,
Selected Tone (Upper,
Layer1, Layer2, Lower1,
Lower2)
Master Tune, Temperament, Temperament
Key, Stretch Tuning
Effect
(On/Off, Type, Parameter 1, Parameter 2,
Effects Part)
Key Touch
Composer
Rotary (SLOW/FAST), Footage
Bass Tone, Chord Tone
Keyboard Parts
Jazz Organ Settings
Rhythm Configuration
Part Balance
Accomp Track, Track Assign
Video Type, Video Output Aspect Ratio,
Output Select, Video Out Mode
Video
CD/Audio Type, Audio Port Mode
On/Off
CD/Audio Port
Ir Function
On/Off, Type
Harmony Intelligence
Layer1 On/Off, Layer2 On/Off,
Lower1 On/Off, Lower2 On/Off,
Split On/Off, Keyboard Transpose,
Split Point
Keyboard Mode
Play Mode, FUNC1, FUNC2, TEMPO,
TRANSPOSE
Remote Control
Tx Channel
MIDI
Functions Assigning
(Left Pedal, Center Pedal, Control Pedal),
Bend Range
Pedal Settings
Reverb
Instruction Mode
Auto Demo
Auto Start, BGM
On/Off, Type, Depth
Master Gain, Audio Rec Gain
Gain
Effect On/Off, Effect Type,
Harmony Level,
Backing Choir (On/Off, Type, Level),
Echo (On/Off, Type, Level)
Language
Vocal Effect
Type, Interval, Sync, Picture Category
Slide Show Settings
Piano Designer Settings
Tone Selection Screen
Reverb
Type, Color, Variation, Length
Anime Settings
MIDI Settings for User
Program
Bank Select (MSB, LSB), Program Change,
Tx PC (On/Off, Channel)
Standard/Alphabetical
On/Off, Type, Depth
Sound
Metronome
Items that change when a button from [1] through [5]
or the on-screen User Program name is held down for a
while when the User Program’s <Arranger Update>
setting is set to “Delayed”
Count Mode, Countdown Sound,
Countdown Track, Count In Sound,
Count In Measure, Count In Repeat
Count
Target
Transpose
Music Style
Tempo
Other Stored Items
Accompaniment Part
Part Balance
Arranger On/Off, Auto Fill In On/Off,
Sync Start On/Off, Intro, Variation,
Leading Bass On/Off, Fade In On/Off
Stored when you switch the setting.
Rhythm Settings
Rhythm Configuration
USB Settings
The setting takes effect the next time you turn
on the power.
Chord Recognition Mode
Stored when you touch the on-screen <Write>
indication after calibrating the touch panel
position.
Touch Screen
Parameters Stored in the User Program Set
User settings are stored when you touch the
on-screen <WRITE> indication.
Jazz Organ Footage
Pedal Shift, Load Next
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Music Files That the RM-700 Can Use
What Are Music Files?
General MIDI
Music files contains musical information such as how long the key for a
corresponding pitch is played, the force applied to the key played, and
other such information. Performance data is transmitted to the RM-700
from music files saved in USB memory and CD-ROM, and played back
without change as songs. This is different than a music CD, since the
music file does not contain a recording of the sound itself. This makes it
possible to change tempos and keys freely, allowing you to use it in many
different ways.
The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a
way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs, and standardize
the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices. Sound generating
devices and music files that meets the General MIDI standard bears the
General MIDI logo. Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be
played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce
essentially the same musical performance.
General MIDI 2
Regarding Copyright
The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up
where the original General MIDI left off, offering enhanced expressive
capabilities, and even greater compatibility. Issues that were not covered
by the original General MIDI recommendations, such as how sounds are
to be edited, and how effects should be handled, have now been
precisely defined. Moreover, the available sounds have been expanded.
General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably
playing back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General
MIDI 2 logo.
Use of the song data supplied with the CD-ROM attached to this product
for any purpose other than private, personal enjoyment without the
permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law. Additionally, this
data must not be copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted work
without the permission of the copyright holder.
Please be aware that if you create derivative works that are based on
existing copyrighted material, such as commercially available SMF music
files, such works may violate copyright law if used for any purpose other
than personal enjoyment. Roland takes no responsibility for any
copyright violation you may commit by creating such works.
In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which does not
include the new enhancements, is referred to as “General MIDI 1” as a
way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2.
The RM-700 Allows You To Use the Following
Music Files
GS Format
●
Floppy disks saved on a Roland MT Series, or Roland Piano Digital HP-
G/R, HPi Series, and KR Series instrument.
The GS Format is Roland’s set of specifications for standardizing the
performance of sound generating devices. In addition to including
support for everything defined by the General MIDI, the highly
compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of
sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many details
for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as reverb and
chorus. Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format can readily
include new sounds and support new hardware features when they
arrive. Since it is upwardly compatible with the General MIDI, Roland’s GS
Format is capable of reliably playing back GM Scores equally as well as it
performs GS music files (music files that have been created with the GS
Format in mind).
●
Roland Digital Piano Compatible Music Files
Roland’s original music file is made specifically for practicing the
piano. Some follow an instructional curriculum, allowing for a
complete range of lessons, such as “practicing each hand separately”
or “listening to only the accompaniment.”
SMF Music Files (720KB/1.44MB format)
SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music file that was
formulated so that files containing music file could be widely compatible,
regardless of the manufacturer of the listening device. An enormous
variety of music is available, whether it be for listening, for practicing
musical instruments, for Karaoke, etc.
XGlite
*
If you wish to purchase SMF Music Files, please consult the retailer
where you purchased your RM-700.
XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that defines the
ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the structure and type
of effects, in addition to the General MIDI 1 specification. XGlite is a
simplified version of XG tone generation format. You can play back any
XG music files using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind
that some music files may play back differently compared to the original
files, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.
SMF with Lyrics
“SMF with Lyrics” refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that contains the
lyrics. When Music Files carrying the “SMF with Lyrics” logo are played
back on the RM-700, the lyrics will appear in its display.
VIMA TUNES
VIMA TUNES is a Roland specification for music files that contains image
and lyric data, allowing you to enjoy songs with lyrics and images
simultaneously. When data bearing the “VIMA TUNES” logo is played
back on a device that bears the same logo, lyrics can be shown on the
screen of a connected external display or television, letting you enjoy
karaoke or watch a slide show.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI implementation Chart
DIGITAL PIANO
Model RM-700
Date : Feb. 1, 2009
Version : 1.00
MIDI Implementation Chart
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Function...
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1
1–16
1–16
1–16
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode 3
x
Mode 3
Mode 3, 4 (M=1)
* 2
Mode
**************
Note
Number :
15–113
**************
0–127
0–127
True Voice
Note ON
Note OFF
O
O
O
O
Velocity
*1
*1
After
Touch
Key’s
Ch’s
x
x
O
O
Pitch Bend
O
O
0, 32
1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Bank select
Modulation
Portamento time
Data entry
O
*1
*1
*1
5
O
6, 38
7
O
O
Volume
10
O
Panpot
Expression
Hold 1
Portamento
Sostenuto
Soft
Portamento control
Effect1 depth
Effect3 depth
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
*1
*1
11
O
Control
Change
64
O
65
O
*1
66
O
67
O
84
O
*1
91
O (Reverb)
93
O (Chorus)
98, 99
O
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
100, 101
Prog
0–127
O
**************
: True #
Change
0–127
Program number 1–128
System Exclusive
O
O
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune
x
x
x
x
x
x
System
Common
System
Real Time
: Clock
: Commands
O
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
O
x
O (120, 126, 127)
: All sound off
O
:
Reset all controllers
Aux
Message
O
: Local Control
: All Notes OFF
: Active Sense
: Reset
O (123–125)
O
x
* 1 O x is selectable.
* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M≠1.
Notes
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Specifications
<Keyboard>
<Metronome>
Tempo
88 keys
Quarter note = 10–500
Keyboard
(PHA II ivory feel Keyboard with Escapement)
Beat
2/2, 0/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8
Touch: 100 levels/Fixed Touch
Hammer Response: Off/1 to 10
Touch Sensitivity
Volume
10 levels
11 patterns
8 types
Metronome Pattern
Metronome Sound
Whole
Split (adjustable split point)
Layer
Rhythm Arranger
Manual Drums/SFX
Twin Piano
Keyboard Mode
<Composer>
Tracks
3 tracks/16 tracks
1 song
Song
<Sound Generator>
88 keys stereo multi-sampling piano sound
Conforms to GM2/GS/XGlite
Note Storage
Resolution
Approx. 30,000 notes
120 ticks per quarter note
Max. Polyphony
128 voices
Realtime (Replace, Mix, Auto Punch In, Manual
Punch In, Loop, Tempo) Step (Chord Sequencer)
Beat Map
Tones
(Tone Search by terms
and by letters)
Recording Method
818 tones (including 8 tone wheel Organs, 17 drum
sets, 9 GM2 drum sets, 1 SFX set)
Copy
Temperament
8 types, selectable tonic
Quantize
Delete
Insert
Off/On
Only for ‘Superior Grand’:
Preset/User/Type1–14
Edit
Erase
Stretched Tuning
Transpose
Part Exchange
Note Edit
PC Edit
(adjustable in individual notes: -50.0–+50.0 cent)
415.3 Hz–466.2 Hz
(adjustable in increments of 0.1 Hz)
Master Tuning
Transpose
<Other Functions>
Key Transpose (-6–+5 in units of semitone)
Playback Transpose
(with Audio CD/Audio File): -6–+5 (in semitones)
Anime
Slide Show
Playing Hint
Piano Roll
Reverb (12 types, 127 levels)
Chorus, Rotary and 60 other types
Dynamic Emphasis (4 types)
Equalizer (5 bands, Master level)
Only for Piano Tones:
Open/close lid (only for piano tones, 7 levels),
Hammer Noise (5 levels),
Damper Resonance (Off/1–10),
Damper Noise (Off/1–10),
DigiScore
Auto Sync DigiScore
Touch the Notes
Piano Designer
Visual Lesson
Wonderland/Game
Twin Piano
Super Tones
Demo
Effects
Duplex Scale (Off/1–10),
String Resonance (Off/1–10),
Key Off Resonance (Off/1–10)
Panel Lock
BMP Export
V-LINK
<Rhythm>
Rhythm
(Rhythm Search by
terms and by letters)
<External Storage> USB Memory
370 rhythms in 10 groups x 4 variations
Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0/1),
Roland Original Format (i-Format)
Tempo, Arranger On/Off, Start/Stop, Sync Start,
Intro, Ending, Intro Count Down, Break, Auto Fill In,
Variation (4 variations), Chord Intelligence,
Leading Bass, Auto Standard Tempo
Playable Software
Music Style: MSA, MSD, MSE
Rhythm Function
Audio File: WAV Format (44.1 kHz 16 bits linear,
stereo),MP3 file (44.1 kHz, 32–320 Kbps)
One Touch Song
(Search by terms and by
letters)
Save
Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0)
509 titles
36 types
<Internal Memory>
Harmony Intelligence
Internal Songs
(Song Search by terms
and by letters)
226 songs + 3 Demo Songs
<User Programs>
Internal
40
Max. 500 songs on Favorites
Max. 500 User Styles
External Memory
Max. 500 sets
User Memory
Max. 500 User Program Sets
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Specifications
<Others>
Rated Power Output
Speakers
60 W x 2
16 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2
Graphic 800 x 480 dots backlit color LCD with touch
screen
Display
Grand staff /G Clef staff /F Clef staff, with note name/
lyrics/chords/fingering
Notation
Language
Lyrics
English/French/German/Japanese/Spanish
Yes (built-in, external display)
One Touch Piano
One Touch Rhythm
One Touch Program
Damper Pedal (half-pedal recognition)
Soft Pedal
(half-pedal recognition, functions assignable)
Sostenuto Pedal (functions assignable)
Pedals
Auto Harmony (3 types)
Transformer (9 types)
Vocal Echo (2 types)
Vocal Effects
Ext Memory connector
Ext Drive connector
Output jacks (L/Mono, R)
Input jacks (L/Mono, R)
Roland Audio Port jacks (L, R)
Mic jack
Connectors
Headphones jack (Stereo) x 2
MIDI In connector
MIDI Out connector
USB MIDI connector
Ext Display connector (15-pin D-Sub type)
Video Out jack
Control Pedal jack
Power Supply
AC 117 V, AC 230 V, AC 240 V
135 W
Power Consumption
Dimensions
(including the piano
stand)
1410 (W) x 550 (D) x 925 (H) mm
55-9/16 (W) x 21-11/16 (D) x 36-7/16 (H) inches
1410 (W) x 550 (D) x 1110 (H) mm
55-9/16 (W) x 21-11/16 (D) x 43-3/4 (H) inches
Including the music rest
Weights
(including the piano
stand)
84.5 kg / 18.7 lbs
Owner’s Manual
Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces
Remote Control
Accessories
Options
Dry-cell Batteries
Power cord
Headphones Hook
Anti-theft lock screws
USB Memory
USB CD Drive: CD-01A
Floppy Disk Drive: FD-01A
*
In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or
appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
CD/Audio Type ........................................................................................ 183
Center Cancel .............................................................................................. 85
[Center Cancel] Button ............................................................................ 85
Center Pedal ............................................................................................. 179
Chord Intelligence ..................................................................................... 56
Chord Sequencer .................................................................................... 162
Chord Tone ........................................................................................ 64, 181
Composer MIDI Out ............................................................................... 198
Computer ................................................................................................... 200
A
[Accomp] Button ....................................................................................... 77
Anime ............................................................................................................ 94
Audio ........................................................................................................... 205
Audio Device ............................................................................................. 199
Audio Port Mode ..................................................................................... 183
Audio Port Sync ....................................................................................... 183
Audio Rec Gain ......................................................................................... 188
Audio Recording
Audio Device ..................................................................................... 199
CD drive ................................................................................................. 25
Computer ........................................................................................... 200
External Display ............................................................................... 192
MIDI Sequencer ................................................................................ 196
MIDI Sound Module ....................................................................... 197
Pedal Cable ........................................................................................... 19
Portable Audio Player .................................................................... 195
Power Cord ........................................................................................... 19
Speaker Cable ...................................................................................... 19
USB Memory ........................................................................................ 23
Control Pedal ............................................................................................... 18
Copying
New Song ........................................................................................... 136
With a Song ........................................................................................ 140
Auto Demo ................................................................................................ 187
[Auto Fill In] Button ........................................................................... 16, 66
Music Style ............................................................................................ 72
Song .............................................................................................. 81, 143
[Count] Button ........................................................................... 17, 65, 115
Count In ............................................................................................. 115, 171
Count Mode ....................................................................................... 65, 115
B
Backing Choir ............................................................................................ 175
Backing Choir Level ................................................................................ 175
[Balance] Knob .................................................................................... 16, 70
Bank Select ................................................................................................ 198
Basic Screen ................................................................................................. 27
Bass Tone ............................................................................................. 64, 181
Bend Range ............................................................................................... 180
BGM .............................................................................................................. 187
Bouncing Ball ............................................................................................ 108
[Break] Button ...................................................................................... 16, 66
Brilliance ....................................................................................................... 45
Music CD ............................................................................................. 145
Song ..................................................................................................... 156
D
Damper Noise ............................................................................................. 31
Damper Pedal .............................................................................................. 21
Damper Resonance ................................................................................... 31
Deleting
Measure .............................................................................................. 165
Music Style ............................................................................................ 74
Recorded Performances ............................................................... 132
Song ..................................................................................................... 142
User Program Set ............................................................................ 153
Demo ............................................................................................. 26, 34, 187
DigiScore .................................................................................................... 106
[DigiScore] Button ........................................................................... 16, 106
C
Cabinet ........................................................................................................ 174
Calling
User Program .................................................................................... 151
CD Drive ........................................................................................................ 25
CD/Audio Sync ......................................................................................... 183
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Door ............................................................................................................. 174
Duplex Scale ................................................................................................ 31
Dynamics ...................................................................................................... 46
Information .................................................................................................. 78
Input ............................................................................................................... 18
Instruction Mode ..................................................................................... 187
Interval ........................................................................................................ 173
[Intro/Ending] Button ............................................................................... 16
Ir Function ................................................................................................. 184
E
Effect Type ................................................................................................... 87
Erasing
Key Touch ........................................................................................... 30, 178
[Exit] Button ................................................................................................. 17
Export .......................................................................................................... 111
Expression Pedal ...................................................................................... 192
Expression Pedal) .................................................................................... 179
External Display ....................................................................................... 192
Language ................................................................................................... 189
Leading Bass ................................................................................................ 55
[Left] Button ................................................................................................. 77
Lid ............................................................................................................. 20, 32
Load Next ................................................................................................... 155
Loading
Local Control ............................................................................................ 198
F
Factory Reset ............................................................................................. 190
[Fast] Button ................................................................................................ 17
Fill In ............................................................................................................... 66
finalization ................................................................................................. 145
Finalize ........................................................................................................ 148
Footage ......................................................................................................... 37
M
Master Gain ............................................................................................... 188
Master Tuning ................................................................................... 32, 176
Measure Display ...................................................................................... 174
Memory Backup ...................................................................................... 189
[Menu] Button ............................................................................................. 17
[Metronome] Button ................................................................................. 17
Mic ................................................................................................................... 18
Mic Volume .................................................................................................. 18
Microphone ................................................................................................. 25
MIDI ....................................................................................................... 18, 196
MIDI Sound Module ............................................................................... 197
MP3 .............................................................................................................. 205
MSB .............................................................................................................. 198
Music CD .................................................................................................... 145
G
Gain .............................................................................................................. 188
H
Hammer Noise ............................................................................................ 30
Hammer Response .................................................................................... 30
Harmony Intelligence .............................................................................. 67
Headphone Hook ...................................................................................... 23
Headphones ................................................................................................ 22
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Music Holders ............................................................................................. 19
Music Rest .................................................................................................... 19
Music Style Buttons .................................................................................. 59
Recording
Remote Control ......................................................................... 20, 83, 184
Rename ....................................................................................... 80, 134, 150
Resonance .................................................................................................... 31
Reverb ............................................................................................................ 42
[Reverb] button .......................................................................................... 16
[Rhythm] Button .................................................................................. 16, 54
Rhythm Buttons ......................................................................................... 16
Rhythm Configuration ................................................................... 57, 181
Rhythm One Touch ................................................................................ 181
[Right] Button .............................................................................................. 77
Roland Audio Port ........................................................................... 18, 195
N
New Song .............................................................................................. 76–77
[
O
Octave Shift ................................................................................................. 41
One Touch Program ................................................................... 16, 28, 54
One Touch Rhythm ................................................................................... 54
Output Select ............................................................................................ 195
Saving
Song .............................................................................................. 79, 134
Search ............................................................................................................ 34
Slide Show .......................................................................................... 90, 173
[Slide Show] Button ........................................................................... 16, 90
[Slow] Button ............................................................................................... 17
P
Part Balance ................................................................................................. 70
Pedal Shift .................................................................................................. 154
Phones .................................................................................................... 18, 22
[Piano] Button ...................................................................................... 16, 28
[Piano Roll] Button ............................................................................. 16, 96
Piano Screen ............................................................................................... 27
Piano Style Arranger ................................................................................ 69
Picture Category ........................................................................................ 91
Play Mode ................................................................................................... 184
New Song ........................................................................................... 125
Redoing Recordings ....................................................................... 131
With a Song ....................................................................................... 129
Soft Pedal ...................................................................................................... 21
Editing ................................................................................................. 163
Mix Recording .................................................................................. 160
[Song] Button ....................................................................................... 17, 75
Song Creation .......................................................................................... 156
Song Edit
[
Playing Hint ................................................................................................. 78
[Power] Switch ........................................................................................... 21
Copy ..................................................................................................... 164
Delete .................................................................................................. 165
Erase ..................................................................................................... 167
Insert .................................................................................................... 166
Part Exchange ................................................................................... 167
Quantize ............................................................................................. 165
Transpose ........................................................................................... 166
Undo .................................................................................................... 164
Sostenuto Pedal ......................................................................................... 21
[
(Prev)] Button ................................................................................. 17
Program Change ..................................................................................... 198
R
[
(Rec)] Button ....................................................................................... 17
Rec Mode .................................................................................................... 159
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND EFFECT ........................................................................................... 36
Split ................................................................................................................. 39
Split Point ................................................................................................... 178
[Start/Stop] Button ................................................................................... 16
Storing
Variation Buttons ....................................................................................... 16
Video ........................................................................................................... 194
Video Out ............................................................................................ 18, 193
Video Out Mode ...................................................................................... 195
Video Type ................................................................................................. 194
Viewpoint .................................................................................................. 174
VIMA TUNES ................................................................................................. 90
Visual Lesson ............................................................................................... 99
V-LINK .......................................................................................................... 196
[V-LINK] Button ........................................................................................... 16
Vocal Effect ......................................................................................... 86, 175
Vocal Effect (Mic) ................................................................................. 86, 88
[Volume] Knob ............................................................................................ 16
User Program .................................................................................... 150
String Resonance ....................................................................................... 31
Style Search ................................................................................................. 60
Super Tones ................................................................................................. 36
Sync Start ...................................................................................................... 63
T
Television ................................................................................................... 193
Temperament Key ............................................................................ 33, 177
Tempo .............................................................................. 82, 113, 169–170
Tempo Buttons ........................................................................................... 17
Tempo Mute .............................................................................................. 114
Tone Control ........................................................................................ 45–46
Tone Search ................................................................................................. 35
Touch Screen ............................................................................................ 188
Touch the Notes ...................................................................................... 107
[Track] Buttons ........................................................................... 17, 77, 116
Transpose ................................................................................................... 122
[Transpose] Button .......................................................................... 17, 122
Twin Piano Game .................................................................................... 105
U
USB .............................................................................................. 18, 186, 200
USB Memory ................................................................................................ 23
[User] Button ............................................................................................... 61
User Program ............................................................................................ 149
[User Program] Button ................................................................... 16, 150
V
[Value] Dial ................................................................................................... 17
Variation ................................................................................................ 66, 95
[Variation] Buttons .................................................................................... 66
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For EU Countries
For China
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For EU Countries
For the USA
This product complies with the requirements of EMCD 2004/108/EC and LVD 2006/95/EC.
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
–
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
(
)
For C.A. US Proposition 65
WARNING
This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm, including lead.
For the USA
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement
Model Name :
Type of Equipment :
Responsible Party :
Address :
RM-700
Digital Piano
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938
(323) 890-3700
Telephone :
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland
distributor in your country as shown below.
PHILIPPINES
CURACAO
URUGUAY
NORWAY
JORDAN
AFRICA
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
Zeelandia Music Center Inc.
Orionweg 30
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa
1771
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD.
Kontor Norge
FREDDY FOR MUSIC
P. O. Box 922846
Amman 11192 JORDAN
TEL: (06) 5692696
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar Al Askalany
Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: (022)-417-1828
Curacao, Netherland Antilles
TEL:(305)5926866
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
TEL: (02) 899 9801
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez
Calle Proyecto Central No.3
Ens.La Esperilla
Santo Domingo,
Dominican Republic
TEL:(809) 683 0305
TEL: 2273 0074
SINGAPORE
SWEE LEE MUSIC
COMPANY PTE. LTD.
150 Sims Drive,
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 6846-3676
KUWAIT
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI
& SONS CO.
Al-Yousifi Service Center
P.O.Box 126 (Safat) 13002
KUWAIT
VENEZUELA
Instrumentos Musicales
Allegro,C.A.
Av.las industrias edf.Guitar
POLAND
ROLAND POLSKA SP. Z O.O.
ul. Kty Grodziskie 16B
03-289 Warszawa, POLAND
TEL: (022) 678 9512
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
import
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo
Caracas, Venezuela
TEL: (212) 244-1122
TEL: 00 965 802929
ECUADOR
Mas Musika
Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma
Guayaquil - Ecuador
PORTUGAL
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Portugal Office
Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL
TEL: 22 608 00 60
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung
Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,
TAIWAN, R.O.C.
LEBANON
Chahine S.A.L.
George Zeidan St., Chahine
Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-
5857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
TEL:(593-4)2302364
SOUTH AFRICA
T.O.M.S. Sound & Music
(Pty)Ltd.
2 ASTRON ROAD DENVER
JOHANNESBURG ZA 2195,
SOUTH AFRICA
EUROPE
EL SALVADOR
OMNI MUSIC
75 Avenida Norte y Final
Alameda Juan Pablo II,
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
AUSTRIA
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
ROMANIA
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
535500 Gheorgheni,
ROMANIA
THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
100-108 Soi Verng
OMAN
Austrian Office
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.
Malatan House No.1
Al Noor Street, Ruwi
SULTANATE OF OMAN
TEL: 2478 3443
TEL: (011)417 3400
Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,
A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
Nakornkasem, New
TEL: (266) 364 609
TEL: 262-0788
Road,Sumpantawongse,
Bangkok 10100 THAILAND
TEL: (02) 224-8821
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.
Royal Cape Park, Unit 24
Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800
Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 799 4900
RUSSIA
MuTek
Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6
117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 981-4967
GUATEMALA
BELGIUM/FRANCE/
HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Central Europe N.V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
Casa Instrumental
Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11
Ciudad de Guatemala
Guatemala
QATAR
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio &
Stores)
P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR
TEL:(502) 599-2888
OCEANIA
SLOVAKIA
ASIA
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
TEL: 4423-554
DAN Acoustic s.r.o.
Povazská 18.
HONDURAS
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.
BO.Paz Barahona
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O
San Pedro Sula, Honduras
TEL: (504) 553-2029
TEL: (014) 575811
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
SAUDI ARABIA
aDawliah Universal
SK - 940 01 Nové Zámky
TEL: (035) 6424 330
CROATIA
ART-CENTAR
Degenova 3.
HR - 10000 Zagreb
TEL: (1) 466 8493
Electronics APL
Behind Pizza Inn
Prince Turkey Street
aDawliah Building,
PO BOX 2154,
Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 8643601
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
SPAIN
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
MARTINIQUE
Musique & Son
Z.I.Les Mangle
97232 Le Lamantin
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 426860
CZECH REP.
CZECH REPUBLIC
DISTRIBUTOR s.r.o
Voctárova 247/16
CZ - 180 00 PRAHA 8,
CZECH REP.
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District Beijing
100011 CHINA
For Australia
SWEDEN
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
Tel: (02) 9982 8266
For New Zealand
Tel: (09) 3098 715
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
Center
PO BOX 13520 BLDG No.17
ABDUL WAHAB
KANAWATI.ST RAWDA
DAMASCUS, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
Gigamusic SARL
10 Rte De La Folie
97200 Fort De France
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 715222
TEL: (2) 830 20270
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
DENMARK
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
SWITZERLAND
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL:(061)975-9987
MEXICO
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico
D.F. MEXICO
TURKEY
ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S.
Galip Dede Cad. No.37
Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 249 85 10
TEL: 3916 6200
TEL: 2415 0911
FINLAND
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial
Finland
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
UKRAINE
EURHYTHMICS Ltd.
P.O.Box: 37-a.
Nedecey Str. 30
UA - 89600 Mukachevo,
UKRAINE
Parsons Music Ltd.
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 2333 1863
NICARAGUA
Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales Nicaragua
Altamira D'Este Calle Principal
de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503
Managua, Nicaragua
BARBADOS
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Ground Floor, Dubai,
U.A.E.
A&B Music Supplies LTD
12 Webster Industrial Park
Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados
TEL: (246)430-1100
GERMANY
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844
Norderstedt, GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
TEL: (03131) 414-40
INDIA
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
411, Nirman Kendra
Mahalaxmi Flats Compound
Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,
Mumbai-400011, INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
UNITED KINGDOM
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda.
Rua San Jose, 211
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
TEL: (04) 3360715
TEL: (505)277-2557
PANAMA
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE
PANAMA
GREECE/CYPRUS
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
NORTH AMERICA
INDONESIA
PT Citra IntiRama
Jl. Cideng Timur No. 15J-15O
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
CANADA
Roland Canada Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way
Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4
CANADA
CHILE
Comercial Fancy II S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
TEL: 315-0101
MIDDLE EAST
PARAGUAY
Distribuidora De
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (595) 21 492147
HUNGARY
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
No.1231&1249 Rumaytha
Building Road 3931, Manama
339 BAHRAIN
KOREA
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint,
HUNGARY
TEL: (604) 270 6626
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
COLOMBIA
Centro Musical Ltda.
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9
Medellin, Colombia
Roland Canada Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
TEL: (23) 511011
PERU
Audionet
Distribuciones Musicales SAC
Juan Fanning 530
Miraflores
TEL: 17 813 942
TEL: (574)3812529
IRELAND
Roland Ireland
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
MALAYSIA
IRAN
MOCO INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 7805-3263
COSTA RICA
JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado
10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
TEL: (905) 362 9707
Lima - Peru
TEL: (511) 4461388
U. S. A.
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
TEL: (021)-2285-4169
TRINIDAD
AMR Ltd
Ground Floor
Maritime Plaza
Barataria Trinidad W.I.
TEL: (868) 638 6385
ITALY
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
VIET NAM
VIET THUONG
CORPORATION
386 CACH MANG THANG
TAM ST. DIST.3,
HO CHI MINH CITY
VIET NAM
ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons
Ltd.
8 Retzif Ha'alia Hashnia St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
TEL: (323) 890 3700
TEL: 9316540
As of Jan. 1, 2009 (ROLAND)
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|